280

Click here to load reader

M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

Embed Size (px)

DESCRIPTION

aimos doc

Citation preview

Page 1: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Andrew Integrated Management and Operating System

User's Manual M0125ANA

Page 2: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 2 M0125ANA.DOC

© Copyright 2013 CommScope, Inc. All rights reserved.

All information contained in this manual has been revised thoroughly. Yet CommScope accepts no liability for any omissions or faults.

CommScope reserves the right to change all hardware and software characteristics without notice.

Names of products mentioned herein are used for identification purposes only and may be trademarks and / or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

No parts of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, transmitted in any form or by any means, electronical, mechanical photocopying, recording or otherwise, without prior written permission of the publisher. Andrew Wireless Systems GmbH, 12-December-2013

Page 3: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

Page 3

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 GENERAL 9 1.1 ABOUT COMMSCOPE 9 1.2 INTERNATIONAL CONTACT ADDRESSES FOR CUSTOMER SUPPORT 10 1.3 CONTENT CHANGES COMPARED TO PREVIOUS MANUAL VERSIONS 13 2 WELCOME TO A.I.M.O.S. 15 2.1 WHAT IS A.I.M.O.S. 15 2.2 COMMENTS ON THE MANUAL 15 2.2.1 Meaning of Symbols 15 2.2.2 Installation Instructions for A.I.M.O.S. 15 2.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS FOR A.I.M.O.S. 16 2.4 GENERAL GUIDELINES 16 2.4.1 Installation Guidelines 16 2.4.2 IE Settings 17

2.4.2.1 IE Cache Settings 17 2.4.2.2 IE Security Configuration 17 2.4.2.3 IE Compatibility Settings 18

2.4.3 External Backup 18 2.5 A.I.M.O.S. CONTAINS 19 2.5.1 A.I.M.O.S. Programs (Accessible via Start Menu) 19 2.5.2 Services Used by A.I.M.O.S. 19 2.5.3 Optional A.I.M.O.S. Components 20 2.5.4 Test Tools (for Andrew technicians only) 20 2.5.5 Related Manuals 20 2.6 A.I.M.O.S. - CLIENT/SERVER 21 2.7 OMC3/ A.I.M.O.S. - SERVER INSTALLATION 22 2.8 CITRIX INSTALLATION 22 3 FOR A QUICK START 23

4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES 25 4.1 PREPARATIONS 25 4.1.1 Preparation of OMC 3.54 for the Combined Installation with A.I.M.O.S. 25 4.1.2 Map (Optional Tool) 25 4.2 A.I.M.O.S. SETUP 26 4.3 A.I.M.O.S. UPDATE 30 4.3.1 A.I.M.O.S. Server Update 30 4.3.2 A.I.M.O.S. Client Update 30 4.4 MIGRATION FROM WINDOWS 2003 32 BIT TO WINDOWS 2008 64 BIT 32 4.5 HOW TO GET A.I.M.O.S. LICENSED 33 4.6 LOGIN SETTINGS 35 5 A.I.M.O.S. CONFIGURATION 39 5.1 SERVER CONFIGURATION / CONFIGURATION TOOL 39 5.1.1 Licenses 40 5.1.2 General - IP Parameters 41 5.1.3 Security 43

5.1.3.1 Password Settings 44 5.1.3.2 Account Settings 45 5.1.3.3 LDAP Settings 46 5.1.3.4 Visualization Login with LDAP 48

Page 4: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 4 M0125ANA.DOC

5.1.4 SNMP Northbound – Interface Settings 48 5.1.4.1 Server Port of the A.I.M.O.S. SNMP Agent 49 5.1.4.2 Default Port for Outgoing SNMP Traps 49 5.1.4.3 Agent Shutdown Delay 49 5.1.4.4 Length of Generated Community Names 49 5.1.4.5 Private SNMP Community Name 49 5.1.4.6 IP Address of Alternate SNMP Agent 49 5.1.4.7 Server Port of Alternate SNMP Agent 50 5.1.4.8 MIB Supported by the Agent 50 5.1.4.9 SNMPv3-related fields 50

5.1.5 OMC 3 51 5.1.6 SMTP Mail Server 51

5.1.6.1 Configuration of Email Forwarding 51 5.1.6.2 SMTP Server (Host Name or IP Address) 52 5.1.6.3 Server Port of the SMTP Server 52 5.1.6.4 From Email Address 52 5.1.6.5 HELO Name 52 5.1.6.6 SASL Login Username 53 5.1.6.7 SASL Login Password 53

5.1.7 SMPP 53 5.1.8 Housekeeping 55 5.2 PREFERENCES EDITOR - CUSTOMIZING A.I.M.O.S. 57 5.3 CONNECTIVITY MANAGER - MODEM MANAGEMENT 61 5.3.1 Discover Modems 63 5.3.2 Modem Groups 63 5.3.3 Profiles 64

5.3.3.1 RAS-in Profiles 64 5.3.3.2 Network Element Circuit Switched Profiles 65 5.3.3.3 Network Element Packet Switched Profiles 65 5.3.3.4 SMS Service Center Profiles 65 5.3.3.5 NE WEB Login Profiles 66

5.4 ACCOUNT MANAGER - USER MANAGEMENT 67 5.4.1 Organizations 69 5.4.2 Account Manager Rights 71 5.4.3 Account Manager Roles 76

5.4.3.1 The Administrator Role 76 5.4.3.2 The Standard User Role 76 5.4.3.3 The Read Only User Role 76

5.4.4 Account Manager Users 77 5.4.5 NE Owner 79 5.4.6 Import / Export 79 5.4.7 Excel Export 80 5.5 NORTHBOUND MANAGER (OPTION) - TRAP FORWARDING TO NMS 81 5.5.1 SNMP Manager 81 5.5.2 Workshift Assignment 85 5.5.3 NE Owner 86 5.6 ALARM POLLING 87 5.7 INTEGRATION OF OMC 3.54 88 5.8 DATABASE EXPORT / ODBC 88 5.9 AUTOMATIC BACKUP 89 5.10 AUDITORY ALARM NOTIFICATIONS 89

Page 5: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

Page 5

6 A.I.M.O.S. - OPERATIONS 91 6.1 NE MANAGEMENT - OVERVIEW 91 6.2 MENUS 92 6.2.1 File 93 6.2.2 Tools 95 6.2.3 Tree 95 6.2.4 View 97 6.2.5 Extras 98 6.2.6 Window 99 6.2.7 Menu ? 99 6.3 NE TREE 100 6.4 VISUALIZATION FILTERS AND SORT OPTIONS 103 6.4.1 Table Filters 103

6.4.1.1 Column Selection and Customizing 103 6.4.1.2 Sort Options and Calculations 104 6.4.1.3 Managing Table Filters and Sort Options 104

6.4.2 Using the Filter Builder 105 6.4.3 Network Element Filter 105

6.4.3.1 Customizing a Filter with the NE Filter Builder 106 6.4.3.2 Filter Settings 107 6.4.3.3 Importing a Filter from the Scheduler 107 6.4.3.4 Filter Type Conversion 108

6.5 ADD NEW NETWORK ELEMENT (NE) 109 6.5.1 Node X 109

6.5.1.1 Basic Parameter Setting 109 6.5.1.2 Dial Parameter Setting 110

6.5.2 AMR 113 6.5.3 MCPA 114 6.5.4 ION-B Controller Type TSUN1, TSUN2, TSUN3 and TSUN6 115 6.5.5 ION-U System / ION-E System 117 6.5.6 ION-M Optical System Controller Type RMC, MMC Plus, TSUN4 118 6.5.7 SMS Network Element 119

6.5.7.1 MRx18 120 6.5.7.2 DICE 120 6.5.7.3 MIR-T 121 6.5.7.4 ION-M MiniMaster 121 6.5.7.5 Generic 121 6.5.7.6 Generic 1 122 6.5.7.7 Generic 2 122 6.5.7.8 MR2003P 122 6.5.7.9 MR2133 122

6.6 ADD NEW FOLDER 123 6.7 NETWORK ELEMENT OPERATIONS 123 6.8 FUNCTIONS BAR 125 6.8.1 Supervision 126

6.8.1.1 Alarm History 127 6.8.1.2 Alarm Help 127

6.8.2 Configuration 128 6.8.3 Maintenance 136 6.8.4 Notes 138 6.8.5 Log 138

Page 6: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 6 M0125ANA.DOC

6.9 CONFIGURATION - CONNECTIVITY 138 6.9.1 Circuit Switched Connection 139 6.9.2 Packet Switched Always On Connection 140

6.9.2.1 Overview 140 6.9.2.2 Change Connectivity Mode to Packet Switched Always On 141

6.9.3 Packet Switched On Demand 142 6.9.3.1 Overview 142 6.9.3.2 Change Connectivity Mode to Packet Switched On Demand 143

6.9.4 Local Area Network 144 6.9.5 Common Features and Settings for all Connection Types 145

6.9.5.1 Buttons 145 6.9.5.2 WEB-Login Configuration 145 6.9.5.3 Alarm Type 145 6.9.5.4 Zone Change Traps 145 6.9.5.5 WEB Server Configuration 146 6.9.5.6 Additional Information 146

6.9.6 VPN Connectivity Parameters 146 6.10 TOOL SCHEDULER (OPTION) 148 6.10.1 Customizing a Schedule 149

6.10.1.1 Step 1: Tab Schedule - Customize the Schedule 149 6.10.1.2 Step 2: Tab Network Elements - Customize the Network Elements 151 6.10.1.3 Step 3: Tab Actions - Customize the Actions 152

6.10.2 XML Import 153 6.10.3 Scheduler Actions 157

6.10.3.1 Event Triggered Actions 159 6.10.3.2 File Upload 162 6.10.3.3 Software Update 166 6.10.3.4 Read Performance Data 171 6.10.3.5 Create Performance Data Chart 172 6.10.3.6 Configure Node A User 173 6.10.3.7 Configure ION-M User 174 6.10.3.8 Create Export 175

6.11 TOOL NETWORK ELEMENT LIST 179 6.12 TOOL JOB MONITOR 180 6.13 TOOL LOG MANAGER 180 6.14 TOOL MAP (OPTION) 182 6.14.1 Buttons 182 6.14.2 Assign a Bitmap to a Folder 183 6.14.3 Assign a Bitmap to a Subfolder of a Bitmap Folder 183 6.14.4 Remove a Bitmap from a Folder 183 6.14.5 Show a Folder Bitmap as Map 183 6.14.6 Show a Sub-Bitmap as Map 184 6.14.7 Including NEs to the Vector Map 184

6.14.7.1 RF Units 184 6.14.7.2 Optical Systems 184

6.14.8 Selecting an NE 185 6.14.9 Moving an NE on the Map 185 6.14.10 Removing NEs from the Map 185

6.14.10.1 RF Units 185 6.14.10.2 Optical Systems 185

6.14.11 NE Subunit Management 185 6.14.11.1 Excluding NE Subunits from an Optical System 185 6.14.11.2 Including NE Subunits to an Optical System 186

6.14.12 View 186

Page 7: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

Page 7

6.15 TOOL WATCHDOG 186 6.16 TOOL PERFORMANCE MANAGER (OPTION) 186 6.16.1 Menus 187

6.16.1.1 Performance 188 6.16.1.2 Chart 188

6.16.2 Settings 188 6.17 TOOL PROFILES 196 6.17.1 Connectivity Manager Profiles 197 6.17.2 NE Owner Profile of Account Manager 197 6.17.3 Configuration Groups of Preferences Editor 198 6.17.4 Alarm Profiles 199 6.17.5 Export Profiles 201 6.17.6 External Tool Profiles 202 6.18 OMC3 ADAPTER 203 6.19 SNMP GUI 203 7 A.I.M.O.S. DATABASE ADMINISTRATION / MAINTENANCE TOOL 205 7.1 BACKUP 205 7.1.1 Backup to File 205 7.1.2 Include A.I.M.O.S. 206 7.1.3 Include OMC3 206 7.1.4 Backup Finished 206 7.2 RESTORE 206 7.2.1 Restore from File 207 7.2.2 Restore A.I.M.O.S. 207 7.2.3 Restore OMC3 207 7.2.4 The List of Backups 207 7.2.5 Restore Configuration Tool Settings 207 7.2.6 Backup Version 208 7.2.7 Restore Finished 208 7.3 VALIDATE 208 7.3.1 Include A.I.M.O.S. 209 7.3.2 Include OMC3 209 7.3.3 Validation Finished 209 7.4 UPDATE 209 7.4.1 Update From File 210 7.4.2 Update Finished 211 7.5 WATCHDOG 211 8 A.I.M.O.S. TEST TOOLS 213 8.1 AGENT SIM 213 8.2 COMAS TEST 215 8.3 MIB 216 8.4 TRAP MONITOR 216 9 LOGGING 217 9.1 LOG FILE DOCUMENTATION 217 9.1.1 Log File Overview 217 9.1.2 Log File Contents 217

9.1.2.1 Installation and Uninstalling 217 9.1.2.2 Database Server Operations 218 9.1.2.3 Connection to OMC3 218 9.1.2.4 Database Maintenance Operations 219 9.1.2.5 Automatic Database Backup 219

Page 8: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 8 M0125ANA.DOC

9.1.2.6 Automatic Database Restore 220 9.1.2.7 Services Supervision 220 9.1.2.8 Connection to Network Elements, Database and Visualization 221 9.1.2.9 Automatic ODBC Export 221 9.1.2.10 Server Update 222 9.1.2.11 SNMP Operations 222

10 TROUBLESHOOTING 223 10.1 RAS CONNECTIONS 223 10.2 TECHNICAL SUPPORT 224 10.3 LICENSE INSTALLATION 227 11 GLOSSARY 229

12 APPENDIX A – MODEM INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION 231

13 APPENDIX B – DIAL-IN CONNECTIVITY 235 13.1 DIAL-IN SERVER CONFIGURATION 235 13.1.1 Security Policy 235

13.1.1.1 Local Security Policy 235 13.1.1.2 Domain Security Policy 236

13.1.2 User Account Data 238 13.1.2.1 Adding a Local Dial-in User 238 13.1.2.2 Adding a Domain Dial-in User 240

13.2 REMOTE ACCESS SERVER CONFIGURATION FOR WIN2003 SERVER – STANDARD EDITION 242

13.2.1 RRAS Server Configuration 242 13.2.2 RRAS Server Configuration Wizard 243 13.2.3 RRAS Server Properties 245 13.2.4 RRAS Policy 248 13.3 REMOTE ACCESS SERVER CONFIGURATION FOR WIN2008 252 13.3.1 RRAS Server Configuration 252 13.3.2 RRAS Server Configuration Wizard 254 13.3.3 RRAS Server Properties 259 13.3.4 Network Policies 262 13.4 TESTING THE REMOTE ACCESS SERVER CONFIGURATION 266 13.4.1 Procedure for Win2003 266 13.4.2 Procedure for Win2008 270

14 APPENDIX C – HTTPS CERTIFICATE HANDLING 273 14.1 CERTIFICATE SELECTION 273 14.2 CERTIFICATE INSTALLATION 274 15 INDEX 277

Page 9: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

1 General

Page 9

1 GENERAL

1.1 ABOUT COMMSCOPE CommScope is the foremost supplier of one-stop, end-to-end radio frequency (RF) solutions. Part of the CommScope portfolio are complete solutions for wireless infrastructure from top-of-the-tower base station antennas to cable systems and cabinets, RF site solutions, signal distribution, and network optimization. CommScope has global engineering and manufacturing facilities. In addition, it maintains field engineering offices throughout the world. Andrew Wireless Systems GmbH based in Buchdorf/ Germany, which is part of CommScope, is a leading manufacturer of coverage equipment for mobile radio networks, specializing in high performance, RF and optical repeaters. Our optical distributed networks and RF repeater systems provide coverage and capacity solution for wireless networks in both indoor installations and outdoor environments, e.g. tunnels, subways, in-trains, airport buildings, stadiums, skyscrapers, shopping malls, hotels and conference rooms. Andrew Wireless Systems GmbH operates a quality management system in compliance with the requirements of ISO 9001 and TL 9000. All equipment is manufactured using highly reliable material. To maintain highest quality of the products, comprehensive quality monitoring is conducted at all fabrication stages. Finished products leave the factory only after a thorough final acceptance test, accompanied by a test certificate guaranteeing optimal operation. The declaration of conformity for our products is available upon request from the local sales offices or directly from CommScope. To make the most of this unit, we recommend you carefully read the instructions in this manual and commission the unit only according to these instructions. For technical assistance and support, contact the local office or CommScope directly at one of the following addresses listed in the next chapter.

Page 10: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 10 M0125ANA.DOC

1.2 INTERNATIONAL CONTACT ADDRESSES FOR CUSTOMER SUPPORT

Americas:

Canada United States

CommScope Canada Andrew LLC, A CommScope Company

Mail 505 Consumers Road, Suite 803 Toronto M2J 4V8 Canada

Mail 620 North Greenfield Parkway Garner, NC 27529 U.S.A.

Phone +1-905-878-3457 (Office) +1-416-721-5058 (Cell)

Phone +1-888-297-6433

Fax +1-905-878-3297 Fax +1-919-329-8950

E-mail [email protected]

E-mail [email protected]

Caribbean & South American Region (CALA)

Caribbean (CALA) & Central American Region

CommScope Cabos do Brasil Ltda. CommScope Mexico S.A. de C.V.

Mail

CALA Tech Support for Distributed Coverage & Capacity Solutions (DCCS) products: Rua Guaporanga, 49 Praça Seca – Rio de Janeiro – RJ ZIP: 21320-180 Brazil

Mail

CALA Tech Support for Distributed Coverage & Capacity Solutions (DCCS) products: Av. Insurgentes Sur 688, Piso 6 Col. Del Valle, CP: 03100 Mexico City Mexico

Phone +1-815-546-7154 (Cell) +55-15-9104-7722 (Office)

Phone +52-1-55-5419-5260 (Cell) +52-55-1346-1900 (Office)

Fax + 55-15-2102-4001 Fax +52-55-1346-1901

E-mail [email protected]

E-mail [email protected]

APAC Countries:

China, India and Rest of Asia Australia & New Zealand

Andrew International Corporation Andrew Corporation (Australia) Pty Ltd.

Mail

Room 915, 9/F Chevalier Commercial Centre 8 Wang Hoi Rd Kowloon Bay Hong Kong

Mail

Unit 1 153 Barry Road Campbellfield VIC 3061 Australia

Phone +852-3106-6100 Phone +613-9300-7969

Fax +852-2751-7800 Fax +613-9357-9110

E-mail [email protected]

E-mail [email protected]

Page 11: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

1 General

Page 11

Europe:

United Kingdom Scandinavia

Andrew Wireless Systems UK Ltd Andrew Norway (AMNW)

Mail

Unit 15, Ilex Building Mulberry Business Park Fishponds Road Wokingham Berkshire RG41 2GY England

Mail

P.O. Box 3066 Osloveien 10 Hoenefoss 3501 Norway

Phone +44-1189-366-792 Phone + 47 32-12-3530

Fax +44-1189-366-773 Fax + 47 32-12-3531

E-mail [email protected] 

E-mail [email protected]

Germany France

Andrew Wireless Systems GmbH CommScope France

Mail Industriering 10 86675 Buchdorf Germany

Mail

Immeuble Le Lavoisier 4, Place des Vosges 92052 Courbevoie France

Phone +49-9099-69-0 Phone +33-1 82 97 04 00

Fax +49-9099-69-930 Fax +33-1 47 89 45 25

E-mail [email protected]

E-mail [email protected]

Austria Switzerland

Andrew Wireless Systems (Austria) GmbH CommScope Wireless Systems AG

Mail Weglgasse 10 2320 Wien-Schwechat Austria

Mail Tiergartenweg 1 CH-4710 Balsthal Switzerland

Phone +43-1706-39-99-10 Phone +41-62-386-1260

Fax +43-1706-39-99-9 Fax +41-62-386-1261

E-mail [email protected]

E-mail [email protected]

Italy Iberia Region - Spain & Portugal

CommScope Italy S.r.l., Faenza, Italy Andrew España S.A.

A CommScope Company

Mail Via Mengolina, 20 48018 Faenza (RA) Italy

Mail

Avda. de Europa, 4 - 2ª pta. Parque Empresarial de la Moraleja Alcobendas, Madrid 28108 Spain

Phone +39-0546-697111 Phone +34-91-745-20 40

Fax +39-0546-682768 Fax +34-91-661-87 02

E-mail [email protected]

E-mail [email protected]

Page 12: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 12 M0125ANA.DOC

Czech Republic

CommScope Solutions Czech Republic C-Com, spol. s r.o

Mail U Moruší 888 53006 Pardubice Czech Republic

Phone +49 871 9659171 (Office) +49 171 4001166 (Mobile)

Fax +49 871 9659172

E-mail [email protected]

Africa & Middle East:

Middle East & North Africa South Africa

CommScope Solutions International Inc. (Branch)

Andrew Wireless Solutions Africa (PTY) LTD

Mail

PO Box 48 78 22 Unit 3206, Floor 32, Jumeirah Business Center 5, Jumeirah Lakes Towers, Dubai United Arab Emirates

Mail

11 Commerce Crescent West Eastgate, Sandton PO Box 786117 Sandton 2146 South Africa

Phone +971 4 390 09 80 Phone + 27 11-719-6000

Fax +971 4 390 86 23 Fax + 27 11-444-5393

E-mail [email protected]

E-mail [email protected]

table 1-1 List of international contact addresses

Page 13: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

1 General

Page 13

1.3 CONTENT CHANGES COMPARED TO PREVIOUS MANUAL VERSIONS Compared to manual version M0125AMA for A.I.M.O.S. Version 2.12, the manual contains the following new / modified information: Additions / changes corresponding to a new SW feature or a feature change:

New feature / change Chapter Content

Update of IE Settings 2.4.2 Chapter extended and

subchapters added

Change in Client update 4.3.2 Description updated

5.1.3 Screenshot updated Maximum User Account Inactivity

5.1.3.2 Header renamed,

description added

New Password Security Level option 5.1.3.1 Description updated

Message changed 5.5.2 Screen shot updated.

Field to prevent gray text added 5.2 Description updated

5.4 Description added ‘Expiry Date’ and ‘Most Recent Use’ settings in Account Manager - User Management 5.4.4 Description added

Use filtered NE List for NE Tree 6.4 Reference to 6.11 added

ION-E system added 6.5, 6.5.5 Descriptions added

SNMPv3 southbound support of Node A 6.5.1, 6.9 Descriptions updated

New action Configure ION-M User 6.10.3, 6.10.3.7

Description updated and new chapter added

Use filtered NE List for NE Tree 6.11 Description updated

Page 14: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 14 M0125ANA.DOC

Amendments to the manual for optimization purposes:

Chapter Content

1.2 Addresses updated

2.2.1 Node X explanation added.

4.2 Information on Microsoft Package installation added

5.2 Default value added to ‘Show Alert Box’ explanation.

6.2.1 Alarm import information of menu “Update” extended and

description of “Export Node G Frequency to XML-Import File” added

6.10.2 “XML-File Location” field information added to a) & b), and

description for c) extended

6.10.3 Editorial change

6.10.3.8 Description extended by detailed example and reference to

chapter 6.10.2 added

13.4.2 Screen shot corrected

Page 15: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

2 Welcome to A.I.M.O.S.

Page 15

2 WELCOME TO A.I.M.O.S.

2.1 WHAT IS A.I.M.O.S.

Andrew Integrated Management and Operating System, called A.I.M.O.S. is a comprehensive software that gives the ability to control and monitor network elements (NE) in mobile networks.

A.I.M.O.S. is an OMC (Operation and Maintenance Center), based on the state-of-the-art in operating complex network systems. The software bundle A.I.M.O.S. contains an SNMP Northbound Manager (option), Map (option), Scheduler (option), Performance Manager (option), as well as Visualization clients. All these sophisticated power tools enable unlimited control and maintenance of network elements in mobile networks.

2.2 COMMENTS ON THE MANUAL

The A.I.M.O.S. software is delivered with a detailed context-sensitive Online-help, which is available at any window of the program (press F1) with the respective help item. The Online-help is based on the ‘A.I.M.O.S. User’s Manual’ in electronic form.

2.2.1 Meaning of Symbols

Meaning of symbols used in the text:

Information: Additional information

Attention!: Emphasizes important information.

Warning!: Emphasizes very important information.

Textual Conventions:

If an application is accessed via menus, the menu-path to this application is described in square brackets, e.g. [Start-Settings-Software-Install..].

If an application is started directly by a double-click, the path to the executable is given in italics, e.g. D:\V1.9.0.109\Setup\setup.exe.

In the following the root directory (where the operating system is installed to) of your PC is referred to as “C:\” drive, the CDROM drive is referred to as “D:\” drive. These declarations may vary depending on your computer system.

Node X represents all Node types, i.e. Node C, G, M, A, A+, and AM.

2.2.2 Installation Instructions for A.I.M.O.S.

The detailed description of the installation is given in chapters 3 to 5.

It is highly recommended to follow all installation steps described in this installation instruction before starting to work with A.I.M.O.S.

Page 16: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 16 M0125ANA.DOC

2.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS FOR A.I.M.O.S.

Server Client Recommendation for a Citrix Server

Minimum Recommen-ded

Minimum Recommen-ded

6 Users 12 Users

OS

WIN 2003 Server R2 Standard Edition, 64 bit

WIN 2008 Server R2 Standard Edition, 64 bit

Windows XP SP3 Pro, 32 bit

Windows 7 Pro, 64 bit

WIN 2008 Server R2 Standard Edition, 64 bit

WIN 2008 Server R2 Standard Edition, 64 bit

CPU Intel Xeon > 2 GHz

2 x Intel Xeon > 3 GHz

Intel Core i5

Intel Core i7 2 x Intel Xeon > 3 GHz

4 x Intel Xeon > 3 GHz

RAM 8 GB 16 GB 4 GB 8 GB 32 GB 48 GB

Network 100 MBit LAN

1 GBit LAN 100 MBit LAN

1 GBit LAN 1 GBit LAN 1 GBit LAN

Disk Space

100 GB 200 GB 10 GB 20 GB 500 GB 1.000 GB

Display 1280 x 1024

1280 x 1024 1280 x 1024

1920 x 1200 1280 x 1024 1280 x 1024

WEB Browser

Internet Explorer 8

Internet Explorer 9

Internet Explorer 8

Internet Explorer 9

Internet Explorer 9

Internet Explorer 9

2.4 GENERAL GUIDELINES

2.4.1 Installation Guidelines

The Connectivity Manager of A.I.M.O.S. uses RAS connections of the operating system (Windows RAS). Each modem to be used (SMS, RAS Incoming connection, RAS Outgoing connection) has to be installed in the operating system.

The WMI (Windows Management Instrumentation) service must be activated

and "operational":

Each modem to be used for Incoming connections has to be added to the RAS Incoming Connections.

To use the Web Interface of A.I.M.O.S., set the browser (IE) settings to:

‘Never dial a connection’ in [Tools-Internet Options-Connections-Dial-Up and Virtual Private Network settings].

None of the three checkboxes in [Tools-Internet Options-Connections-Dial-Up and Virtual Private Network settings-LAN Settings] must be checked.

Page 17: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

2 Welcome to A.I.M.O.S.

Page 17

2.4.2 IE Settings

Observe that IE Settings are user-specific as a Windows default administrative setting. The customer can decide to configure these settings individually for all relevant users or to assign a universal setting via Group Policy or Registry.

If these settings are changed whilst the A.I.M.O.S. Visualization is running, a restart of the Visualization is required in order for the changes to take effect.

2.4.2.1 IE Cache Settings

1. Select Internet Explorer Tools Internet Options General Browsing History.

2. Click the “Delete” button.

3. In the “Temporary Internet Files” area, click the “Delete Files…” button to clear the cache. Close that window

4. Still under General Browsing History click the “Settings” button “Check for newer versions of stored pages” has to be set to “Every time I visit the webpage”.

5. Change setting under “Days to keep pages in history“ to “0”.

6. To exit, click the “OK” buttons at the bottom of the Settings and Internt Options windows.

2.4.2.2 IE Security Configuration

Please note that the security level “High” set for the Internet Zone will not work. It is necessary to set the six listed IE security options accessible via Open Tools Internet Options Security Internet Zone Custom Level as follows:

Miscellaneous: Allow META REFRESH set to "Enable"

Miscellaneous: Submit non-encrypted form data set to "Enable"

Scripting: Active scripting set to "Enable"

Downloads: File download set to "Enable"

Downloads: Automatic prompting for file downloads set to "Enable"

For ION-M systems the following settings depend on the different MC SW versions integrated in A.I.M.O.S.:

In case at least one ION-M system with MC SW version <V5.20 is integrated:

o Initialize and script ActiveX controls not marked as safe for scripting set to "Enable" (Note: This setting is necessary even it is classified as 'unsecure' by IE. Otherwise the 'Maintenance->Download Logfiles' option via ION-M web page will not work.)

OR If only ION-M systems with MC SW version V5.20 or higher are integrated, the following two secure settings replace the unsecure setting above:

o ActiveX controls and plug-ins: Run ActiveX controls and plug-ins => set to "Enable", and

o ActiveX controls and plug-ins: Script ActiveX controls marked safe for scripting => set to "Enable".

Page 18: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 18 M0125ANA.DOC

2.4.2.3 IE Compatibility Settings

At least IE Version 8 is required as browser. However in IE 8 and from IE 10 onwards the “Browser Mode” accessible via Tools menu F12 Developer Tools (see exemplary figure of IE 10 below) has to be adjusted as follows:

in IE 8: from “Internet Explorer 8 – Compatibility View” to "Internet Explorer 8"

from IE 10 onwards: "Internet Explorer 8" or "Internet Explorer 9” must be set"

2.4.3 External Backup

For an external backup of the A.I.M.O.S. server (e.g. with Acronis), the complete server must be shut down.

Page 19: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

2 Welcome to A.I.M.O.S.

Page 19

2.5 A.I.M.O.S. CONTAINS

2.5.1 A.I.M.O.S. Programs (Accessible via Start Menu)

Designation Short Description See this manual, chapter

Server Configuration

Use to start the Configuration Tool for the configuration of A.I.M.O.S. server settings.

5.1 Server Configuration / Configuration Tool

Visualization Use to start A.I.M.O.S. Visualization (GUI). all

Server Maintenance

Use to start the Maintenance Tool for the A.I.M.O.S. SW & database maintenance.

7 A.I.M.O.S. Database Administration /

Maintenance Tool

System Information

Use to create a summary of information that is relevant for troubleshooting

10.2 Technical Support

SNMP GUI Use for the graphical supervision of the

SNMP Agent

5.1.4 SNMP Northbound – Interface Settings 6.19 SNMP GUI

2.5.2 Services Used by A.I.M.O.S.

Designation Short Description See this manual, chapter

OMC3 Adapter

Used by A.I.M.O.S. for OMC3 synchronization.

2.7 OMC3/ A.I.M.O.S. - Server Installation

5.1.5 OMC 3 5.7 Integration of OMC 3.54

6.18 OMC3 Adapter

SNMP Agent Used by A.I.M.O.S. for the

synchronization of SNMP traps

5.1.4 SNMP Northbound – Interface Settings 6.19 SNMP GUI

Connector Used by A.I.M.O.S. for connection to

NEs.

5.1.2 General - IP Parameter (for configuration)

6.13 Tool Log Manager (for supervision)

Tool WatchDog

Used by A.I.M.O.S. to supervise and manage all three A.I.M.O.S services

mentioned above and all started OMC3 applications (if installed)

6.15 Tool Watchdog 7.5 WatchDog

Page 20: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 20 M0125ANA.DOC

2.5.3 Optional A.I.M.O.S. Components

For all the components in the following an according license is required:

Designation Short Description See this manual, chapter

Map Use this tool to display NEs with their

location in maps. 4.1.2 Map (Optional Tool) 6.14 Tool Map (Option)

SNMP Northbound

Manager

Use for setting the addresses of the Network Management Systems (NMS)

which are to receive SNMP Alarm Traps.

5.5 Northbound Manager (Option) - Trap Forwarding

to NMS

Scheduler Use this tool for the automization of NE Operations and for multi-configuration.

6.10 Tool Scheduler (Option)

Performance Manager

Use this tool for the evaluation of alarms and performance data

6.16 Tool Performance Manager (Option)

LDAP Use for setting up a user management via

Windows active directory. 5.1.3.3 LDAP Settings

2.5.4 Test Tools (for Andrew technicians only)

Designation Short Description See this manual, chapter

AgentSim This program serves to simulate different

NE types. 8.1 Agent Sim

ComasTest This program serves to simulate devices

connected via Comas protocol. 8.2 Comas Test

MIB This program is a MIB viewer 8.3 MIB

TrapMonitor This program is used to receive test traps. 8.4 Trap Monitor

2.5.5 Related Manuals

Title of Manual Manual Location

ODBC Interface manual M0125B5x_ODBC_

AIMOS_Vx.pdf

Automatic Backup Feature manual M0125B6x_AIMOS_

Auto_Backup.pdf

XML Interface Description M0125B7x_XML_IF

_AIMOS_Vx.pdf

A.I.M.O.S. CD

AIMOS SNMP Interface Description <Title>.pdf

AIMOS SNMPv3 Configuration Guide <Title>.pdf

AIMOS SNMP Interface Description for Nokia NetAct

<Title>.pdf

"~\Andrew\AIMOS\MIB \<Title>.pdf

Page 21: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

2 Welcome to A.I.M.O.S.

Page 21

A.I.M.O.S. – Installation Variants

The following figures show three variants depending on the managed network elements.

The Firebird data base server is installed under the NETWORK Service Account.

2.6 A.I.M.O.S. - CLIENT/SERVER

A.I.M.O.S. Client/Server installation for 3G repeater systems only. A.I.M.O.S. native clients can access the A.I.M.O.S. server remotely.

SNMPAgent

DBFirebird

Connectorbinary SNMP

Server

MMR/ION-M System

Node A/M/C/G LAN, GSM

or Packet Data

GSM, UMTS or Packet Data

binary SNMP

SMS

Repeater with SMS IF

BriteCell/ION-B SNMP

LAN, GSM or Packet Data

GSM/ SMS

email, SMS

Export

Visualization Visualization Client

LAN

NMSPOP3,SMS receiver

Config ServerTool Excel file and ODBC:

- Alarm Data Server Main- - Inventory Data tenance - General Repeater Tool Data

- Config Data - Connectivity Data

Page 22: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 22 M0125ANA.DOC

2.7 OMC3/ A.I.M.O.S. - SERVER INSTALLATION

2.8 CITRIX INSTALLATION

SNMPAgent

DB Firebird

Connectorbinary SNMP

Server

MMR/ION-M System

Node A/M/C/G

GSM, UMTS or Packet Data

binarySNMP

SMS

Repeater with SMS IF

BriteCell/ION-B

SNMP

LAN, GSM or Packet Data

GSM/ SMS

DBFoxpro

Connector ASCII

email, SMS

MR & MOR Systems

ASCII

GSM

Export

Import

VisualizationVisualizationFront End Front End

A.I.M.O.S. server installation for all generation repeater systems. GUI runs on the server only. OMC3 module (for 1st and 2nd generation systems) is shown at the left part.

OMC3 Adapter

LAN, GSM or Packet Data

SNMPAgent

DB Firebird

Connectorbinary SNMP

CITRIX Server

MMR/ION-M System

Node A/M/C/G

LAN, GSM or Packet Data

GSM, UMTS or Packet Data

binary

SNMP

SMS

Repeater with SMS IF

BriteCell/ION-BSNMP

LAN, GSM or Packet Data

GSM/SMS

DB Foxpro

Connector ASCII

email, SMS

MR & MOR Systems

ASCII

GSM

Export

Import

VisualizationVisualizationFront End Front End

CITRIX Client

LAN

VisualizationVisualizationFront End Front End

OMC3 Adapter

A.I.M.O.S. installation with Citrix for all generation repeater systems. GUI runs remotely as Citrix client.

Page 23: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

3 For a Quick Start

Page 23

3 FOR A QUICK START This chapter gives a brief overview of the installation of A.I.M.O.S. Detailed information is given in the respective chapter. Please keep in mind that A.I.M.O.S. also provides an online-help covering most features and tools.

What to do Details

Software Installation

To prepare A.I.M.O.S for an OMC 3.54* integration, please read chapter 4.1.1 carefully, before starting the installation procedure.

Insert the A.I.M.O.S. CD, start setup.exe for the installation or update.exe for an update and follow the installation instructions.

Please read and observe the installation instructions in chapter 4, as well.

Note: If an OMC 3.54* is to be integrated, the OMC3 Adapter has to be installed, and for using SNMP Forwarding, the SNMP Agent has to be installed (see chapter 4.2 A.I.M.O.S. Setup) .

Activate License Key

See chapters 5.1.1 Licenses and 4.5 How to get A.I.M.O.S. licensed.

Server Configuration

The A.I.M.O.S. server has to be customized with the Configuration Tool. For details see chapter 5.1 Server Configuration / Configuration Tool.

User Management Account Manager

Users for A.I.M.O.S. have to be created and access rights have to be granted. For details see chapter 5.4 Account Manager - User Management

Modem Management Connectivity Manager

The Connectivity Manager tool has to be used to optimize modems and connections. For details see chapter 5.3 Connectivity Manager - Modem Management.

Option SNMP Northbound Manager

If the optional SNMP Northbound Manager is licensed, it has to be customized. For details see chapter 5.5 Northbound Manager (Option) - Trap Forwarding to NMS.

Option Integration of OMC 3.54

For integrating an existing OMC 3.54 into A.I.M.O.S. see chapter 5.7 Integration of OMC 3.54.

Visualization and Customization of A.I.M.O.S.

For the complete description on how to use A.I.M.O.S., please see chapter 6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations.

* The OMC 3.54 is the last OMC version available and the only one still supported by A.I.M.O.S. Therefore, this manual only refers to OMC 3.54 whereas the online help still sticks to the more general designation OMC 3.x(x).

Page 24: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 24 M0125ANA.DOC

What to do Details See chapter

Modem Configuration

The modem/modems for remote connections have to be configured. Ensure that ‘Flow Control’ = Hardware is selected.

12 Appendix A – Modem

Installation and Configuration

What to do Details See chapter

Dial-In Connection

For the connection from the repeater systems to A.I.M.O.S. Dial-In connections can be used. The installation for the Dial-In connections varies depending on the used operation system.

13 Appendix B – Dial-In

Connectivity

Page 25: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

4 Installation Procedures

Page 25

4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES

4.1 PREPARATIONS

Note: Please observe that for detailed information about port and firewall settings a separate document (the Whitepaper ‘Architectural Examples for secure data network environments of Andrew Repeater Elements, Data Connections and Components’) is available.

When using A.I.M.O.S. or OMC 3.54 in a Citrix environment the “Installation Mode” of Citrix must be activated in advance.

4.1.1 Preparation of OMC 3.54 for the Combined Installation with A.I.M.O.S.

For A.I.M.O.S. to run with an OMC 3.54 on the same machine, the following steps have to be executed before A.I.M.O.S. is installed:

In case ION (MMR) systems are integrated into the OMC 3.54, these systems have to be manually deleted and later manually integrated into A.I.M.O.S. The OMC3 Adapter of A.I.M.O.S. does not support the automatic data transfer of these systems into A.I.M.O.S.

The OMC3 users and their defined rights are not mapped automatically to A.I.M.O.S. due to a different logic. This information has to be transferred manually. A helpful option in the OMC3 is to print a list of the users and their rights.

The OMC3 SNMP agent has to be stopped. The traps are all transferred to A.I.M.O.S. via the OMC3 Adapter (see chapter 6.18) and forwarded via the A.I.M.O.S. Northbound SNMP Agent (see chapters 5.1.4 and 5.5) which is based on the A.I.M.O.S. database. Take care that the distinguished names of the network elements that are mapped on A.I.M.O.S. side to the field ‘trap info’ are entered. Otherwise for that specific NE the alarms would not be forwarded via the SNMP Northbound Agent.

Make sure that the OMC3 IP Server is stopped. This server scans automatically and locks the RAS entries on the server, but together with A.I.M.O.S. at least a couple of them are reserved for A.I.M.O.S. and the supervision of the 3rd generation NE.

The automatic backup of the OMC3 has to be stopped. For the common scenario the backup is triggered from the ‘Server Maintenance Tool’. To execute a backup either manually or automatically out of the OMC 3.54 application could lead to data inconsistency between the OMC3 database and the A.I.M.O.S. database.

Every OMC3 application has to be stopped manually before the installation of A.I.M.O.S. After the A.I.M.O.S. setup the OMC3 Adapter service will only start up correctly in case any OMC3 application was completely stopped.

4.1.2 Map (Optional Tool) This tool is based on the product ‚Microsoft Map Point‘. Please follow the installation instructions given by Microsoft. For details about the A.I.M.O.S. Map tool please see chapter 6.14.

Prior to using this tool: a license for A.I.M.O.S. with tool Map included has to be installed, Microsoft® MapPoint 2006 or 2009 with the correct maps (e.g. for Europe or the

US) has to be installed.

Page 26: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 26 M0125ANA.DOC

4.2 A.I.M.O.S. SETUP

Insert the A.I.M.O.S. CD into the CD drive and install A.I.M.O.S. by starting D:\Setup\setup.exe ...or any other path depending on the letter representing the CD drive.

Note: Unlike in former versions of Windows, the file ‘Andrew A.I.M.O.S. V2.x.0.msi’ will no longer work for an installation under Windows 2008 or Windows 7. For those and subsequent systems using the ‘setup.exe’ file is mandatory.

The following window is only displayed if the Microsoft Visual C++ Package suggested (which is required by the Firebird Database Server) is not yet installed on your system,. In that case confirm by clicking the Install button.

The InstallShield Wizard starts. Click Next >.

Choose to accept the terms in the license agreement.

Page 27: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

4 Installation Procedures

Page 27

Enter your user name and (optionally) your organization. Select to install A.I.M.O.S. for all users of the PC.

Confirm the selection of the installation folder or select a different folder (Change…). Please observe that the name of such an individual folder must not contain any special character.

Select the setup type of installation: Client: Only the A.I.M.O.S. client is installed. The client needs a connection to the A.I.M.O.S. server. Note: The installation of an A.I.M.O.S. client requires Windows admin rights.

Typical Server: The A.I.M.O.S. server with the database is installed to this PC. The OMC3 adapter and the SNMP Northbound Agent are not installed. Note: The installation of an A.I.M.O.S. server requires Windows admin rights.

Custom: Select this setup type for the installation of additional features (e. g. OMC3 Adapter or SNMP Agent) by selecting the according feature in the Custom Setup Select the program parts you want to install as explained in the following:

Page 28: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 28 M0125ANA.DOC

TestTools: This test tool (Hardware Simulation tool) is for Commscope technicians only. It is not part of the A.I.M.O.S. application package and can be used for system analysis.

SNMP Agent: This service is necessary for the SNMP Northbound Interface. It must be selected for using SNMP alarm forwarding.

A.I.M.O.S. Client: This is the A.I.M.O.S. GUI.

OMC3 Adapter: Install this part only if A.I.M.O.S. has to run with OMC 3.54. To confirm the selected installation, click ‘Install’. (By clicking ‘Back’ changes to the installation setup can be made.)

Page 29: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

4 Installation Procedures

Page 29

The status of the installation process is displayed.

Then, the installation is complete. Click ‘Finish’.

Before starting the Visualization, access the Server Configuration / Configuration Tool (chapter 5.1) for licensing and for further settings. The licensing procedure is described in chapter 4.5.

For updates please continue with the next chapter.

Page 30: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 30 M0125ANA.DOC

4.3 A.I.M.O.S. UPDATE

4.3.1 A.I.M.O.S. Server Update

For an update of A.I.M.O.S. versions V1.3.x up to V1.4.x, stop the services A.I.M.O.S. Connector, A.I.M.O.S. SNMP Agent and (if installed) A.I.M.O.S. OMC3 Adapter [Start-Settings-Control Panel-Administrative Tools–Services].

For versions V1.5.x and higher, the services are stopped automatically by the update routine. Start the update procedure by double-clicking D:\Update\Update.exe.

Administrative rights are required for the update procedure.

Under Windows 2000 an update is only possible up to V2.5.0. Under Windows 2008 we recommend using the "Administrator" account for the update procedure.

After an update to V2.9 or higher, the SMPP passwords (configured in the Server Configuration Tool; see sections 5.1 and 5.1.7) must be entered anew.

For licensing information please refer to chapter 4.5 How to get A.I.M.O.S. licensed. For more detailed information about the server update refer to chapter 7.4 Update.

When using A.I.M.O.S. in a Citrix environment the “Installation Mode” of Citrix must be activated in advance.

4.3.2 A.I.M.O.S. Client Update

As soon as an A.I.M.O.S. server update is finished, the client update will start automatically with the next start of any Visualization client. But - depending on the client and/or server version - the automated update may not be possible or restricted:

Client Version (update from ... to…) Automatic Update from version V2.12 onwards to a version >/=V2.13 Possible *

Restrictions for Server Versions With 64-Bit versions of Windows7 the client update is only working if Windows option “run as admin” is chosen. *

Uninstall the according old client and carry out the new setup.exe again, available either from the A.I.M.O.S. CD or via download.

* Due to the data base change from InterBase to Firebird, a client update from A.I.M.O.S. versions before V2.13.0 is not possible, and an error message will be displayed. In such a case, unsinstall the old A.I.M.O.S. client and install a new Client V2.13.

Page 31: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

4 Installation Procedures

Page 31

Note: An automatic update of an A.I.M.O.S. client requires Windows admin rights, otherwise the Login screen will appear again.

If the following warning is displayed initially, close it by choosing 'No' and start the Visualization anew.

Then, the actual client update procedure starts. Depending on the software version not all of the screens shown in the following may be displayed. In any case, confirm all screens you get with 'Yes'.

When the client update is finished, the following screen is displayed:

Page 32: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 32 M0125ANA.DOC

4.4 MIGRATION FROM WINDOWS 2003 32 BIT TO WINDOWS 2008 64 BIT

To update and migrate an existing A.I.M.O.S. installation – only possible for A.I.M.O.S. version 2.8 and higher – from a Windows 2003 Server system to a Windows 2008 Server system, proceed step by step as described in the following:

Old Windows 2003 Server (preparation):

1. Update A.I.M.O.S. to version 2.8 or higher*, otherwise check at A.I.M.O.S. Visualization with "?" and "Info" if an A.I.M.O.S. patch was installed.

2. Check with "add or remove programs" and "Modify" which optional features are installed, e.g. TestTools, SNMP Agent, Server, Client, OMC3 Adapter.

3. Perform a database backup with the A.I.M.O.S. Maintenance Tool. The database backup is saved as zip file.

New Windows 2008 Server (preparation):

4. Install A.I.M.O.S. version 2.8 or higher* with the same optional features as before and, if possible, to exactly the same location as at the Windows 2003 system. Please note:"C:\Program Files" could not be possible due to windows restrictions. If applicable, install all A.I.M.O.S. patches as before. Please note: If your Windows 2003 Server was updated, no patch installation is required anymore.

5. Copy the database backup zip file from the Windows 2003 system to the A.I.M.O.S. installation.

6. If applicable: Copy all repeater update files from the Windows 2003 system to exactly the same location resp. to the relative location.

Further steps (which cannot be prepared):

7. Shut down the Windows 2003 Server or at least deactivate all tasks in scheduler

8. If possible: Make sure that its IP address is now used by the Windows 2008 Server. Otherwise all IP connections from A.I.M.O.S. to a repeater have to be updated (because all repeaters still refer to IP address of the old A.I.M.O.S. Server).

9. If applicable: Switch all modems from the Windows 2003 system to the Windows 2008 system and make sure that incoming and outgoing connections are working properly. Please also refer to chapter 13 Appendix B – Dial-In Connectivity.

10. Make a restore of the A.I.M.O.S. installation at the Windows 2008 Server with the A.I.M.O.S. Maintenance Tool. Restore the most recent backup zip file from the Windows 2003 A.I.M.O.S. installation.

Please Note: If your installation is now located in another directory, e.g. "C:\Program Files (x86)", do not check the option "Restore Server Configuration Tool Settings". In this case after restore a review of all settings in the Server Configuration / Configuration Tool is mandatory.

* The installed A.I.M.O.S. version at the windows 2003 system and at the windows 2008 system has to be identical.

Page 33: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

4 Installation Procedures

Page 33

11 To basically check your new installation, proceed as follows:

11.1 Perform a database validation with the A.I.M.O.S. Maintenance Tool, then check the database integration.

11.2 Perform a "Try Connection" to all repeaters, to check if each connection is working properly.

11.3 Check all log files for hints or pending adaptations.

11.4 If applicable: Check all scheduled repeater updates in the Tool Scheduler (Option).

4.5 HOW TO GET A.I.M.O.S. LICENSED

Please note: In case of any problems during license installation, refer to the corresponding Troubleshooting chapter 10.3.

There are 3 different types of A.I.M.O.S. licenses:

Time-limited (60 days) trial license

This license includes all optional features and expires after 60 days. It can be extended to a second trial period.

To order a trial license, please contact [email protected].

Time-limited (14 days) update license

This license is installed automatically during update. It has the same restrictions as the original license. This license ensures that there is no interruption in the use of A.I.M.O.S. SW after an update. Within this time period (14 days) a not-time-limited (permanent) license must be installed.

Not time-limited (permanent) license

This license must be purchased. To get your A.I.M.O.S. SW licensed permanently, proceed as described in the following.

Page 34: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 34 M0125ANA.DOC

1. Install the A.I.M.O.S. SW as explained in the previous chapters.

2. Put the A.I.M.O.S. License File received by e-mail onto the A.I.M.O.S. Server file system (e.g. drive C:).

3. Select StartPrograms Andrew A.I.M.O.S. Server Configuration to start the A.I.M.O.S. Configuration Tool and choose Licenses.

Press the Add License File button.

3. Select the License File and press the ‘OK’ button. 4. Double-check that the license you are going to install

o is for your Organization (MCC/MNC), and

o has not already been used for another A.I.M.O.S. project within your Organization

Note:

It is illegal to install and use the A.I.M.O.S. Server Software on multiple physical or virtual servers. A license file is for one single installation only.

5. Type ‘YES’ and press ‘OK’ button:

Page 35: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

4 Installation Procedures

Page 35

4.6 LOGIN SETTINGS

Server only:

If the Visualization is automatically launched directly after the setup procedure (see chapter 4.2), a valid license must be installed during the login process. For this purpose the Configuration Tool (see 5.1 Server Configuration / Configuration Tool) will be started automatically but no further settings can be made.

Thus, if more settings are required or in case of doubt, starting the Server Configuration to install the license and to configure the system before the Visualization is started for the first time is recommended. In that case, please proceed as described in chapter 4.5 How to get A.I.M.O.S. licensed.

Client only:

The following Watchdog Client window is displayed if no connection to the WatchDog service can be established at the first start of the Visualization after a Client only installation.

Make the required entries, i.e. ‘Server IP’’ (= IP Adress of the A.I.M.O.S. Server) and ‘Server Port‘ (= Server Port of the WatchDog) for setting information see explanation of login dialogue in the Server and Client Settings section on the next page). Confirm with the ‘Enter’ key or by clicking the button ‘Change A.I.M.O.S. Server IP / Port’ (each connection try is shown in the status bar) to get to the login dialogue, where the entries made will be adopted.

It is also possible to close the window without making these entries by clicking the red X; in that case, the entries have to be made in the login dialogue.

After a successful first login the WatchDog message will no longer be displayed in subsequent logins.

In case the window is displayed again or does not close, please verify the network settings of the A.I.M.O.S. Server and A.I.M.O.S. Client as well as those of the network used (e. g. firewall settings, etc.).

Page 36: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 36 M0125ANA.DOC

Server and Client Settings:

In the A.I.M.O.S. login screen, use the ‘Hide Connection Setup’ / ‘Show Connection Setup’ buttons to hide / show the fields ‘IP Address of the Database Server’ and ‘Server Port of the WatchDog’ (generally, these fields are only displayed if the information is still missing or incorrect):

The fields must be set as follows:

‘IP Address of the Database Server’ IP address of the A.I.M.O.S. server (127.0.0.1 is the address of the computer you are working at).

‘Server Port of the WatchDog’ The default port 7422 can be changed if it is used by another application, but please observe that the ‘Server Port of the WatchDog’ of the Server Configuration / Configuration Tool (see chapter 5.1) must be adapted accordingly. For port and firewall settings a security whitepaper is also available (see chapter 4.1).

Note: If LDAP has already been enabled (e g. on the Server level in case of a Client installation) the login differs slightly. For details see chapter 5.1.3.4.

Only at the first login as ‘Admin’ the system will prompt a window to enter an individual password after entering the Username ‘Admin’ and the initial default password ‘start’:

Then, the license must be installed (via the A.I.M.O.S. Server Configuration / Configuration Tool):

Page 37: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

4 Installation Procedures

Page 37

If no valid license is at hand, abort the login by clicking ‘No’. You can resume the process as soon as a license is available, either directly by starting the A.I.M.O.S. Visualization anew (continue here) or via the Server Configuration / Configuration Tool as explained in chapter 4.5.

Upon clicking ‘Yes’ a window to choose the license file will open:

Browse to the location where the license file is stored and open it.

The License Key will be entered automatically to the Add License window:

Upon clicking OK the license will be installed and the following confirmation is displayed:

Click OK to start the Visualization.

Page 38: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 38 M0125ANA.DOC

For your notes:

Page 39: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

5 A.I.M.O.S. Configuration

Page 39

5 A.I.M.O.S. CONFIGURATION

Please note: All settings made in the following chapters (except 5.8 to 5.10) are included in an A.I.M.O.S. backup file, so it is recommendable to make a new backup if settings in the A.I.M.O.S. Configuration Tool or other configuration settings described in the next chapters were changed.

5.1 SERVER CONFIGURATION / CONFIGURATION TOOL

Select StartPrograms Andrew A.I.M.O.S. Server Configuration

to start * the A.I.M.O.S. Configuration Tool.

* Please note: Only users with the "Administrator Role" assigned (see chapter 5.4.3.1) are allowed to

start the Sever Configuration. The ‘Security’ page is only available for the user ‘Admin’ irrespective of the user role

assigned.

Click the button 'Reload' to delete the changes made in the current session and to display the actual settings. Use the Backup button to make a backup of all current "Configuration Tool" settings (except those of the page “Licenses”) in an "A.I.M.O.S. Settings File", which is an A.I.M.O.S.-specific file format ending on "set" that cannot be changed. Use the Restore button to restore all "Configuration Tool" settings (except those of the page “Licenses”). Note: Please observe that these Backup / Restore buttons are not identical to the A.I.M.O.S. database backup/restore described in chapters 7.1 & 7.2. However, some of the settings saved or restored by them are also part of the A.I.M.O.S. database backup/restore.

Page 40: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 40 M0125ANA.DOC

5.1.1 Licenses

The following items and tools can be activated by the A.I.M.O.S. license: Number of NEs Expiration date (one option is ‚endless‘) SNMP Northbound Manager Map Scheduler Performance Manager LDAP

These items may cause a new or additional license key request. For more information please contact Andrew Wireless Systems product support. Regarding the licensing procedure and important restrictions to be observed, see also chapter 4.5 How to get A.I.M.O.S. licensed. Open the tab Licenses. Click the Add license button to register the license key for A.I.M.O.S. Enter the Organization Code and the License Key. Or press Browse to select the License file from a directory.

Double-clicking the license key file in the explorer at the PC where the database is installed will automatically add the new license key.

Please note: In case of any problems during license installation, refer to the corresponding Troubleshooting chapter 10.3.

Page 41: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

5 A.I.M.O.S. Configuration

Page 41

5.1.2 General - IP Parameters

Select General to check or edit the IP parameters.

The following IP Ports/Settings have to be configured or can be accepted as default (for port settings please see Security Whitepaper as explained in chapter 4.1):

Parameter Path / Description Default

Server Port of the OMC Server

ServerConfigTool | General | Server Port of the OMC Server (A.I.M.O.S.)

7420

SNMP Trap Port of the OMC Server

ServerConfigTool | General | SNMP Trap Port of the OMC Server (A.I.M.O.S.)

162

Base-Port for Con-nections to V.)

Server ConfigTool / General Base-Port for Connections to Visualizations

50000

Visu Gateway Port

Port for communication between OMC Server and A.I.M.O.S. Visu. Please note: Use default setting 5060 if you wish to update an old A.I.M.O.S. client (V2.5.0.111 or less). Please observe that port 5060 is also the default port of SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) for VoIP communication.

5060

Server Port of the WatchDog *

ServerConfigTool | General | Server Port of the WatchDog

7422

Default shutdown timeout (Minutes)

The WatchDog informs about applications that need to be stopped for some features (e.g. Backup) and will stop them automatically after a defined period. Changes made with these applications will not be saved. Enter the time the WatchDog will wait before shutting them down, so that this period can be used to save the changes.

5

* This setting must be consistent with the ‘Server Port of the WatchDog’ of the Visualization (see 4.6).

Page 42: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 42 M0125ANA.DOC

Parameter Path / Description Default

Modem Session Timeout (Minutes)

A connection to a unit will be terminated after an adjustable time. Enter the idle time (in minutes) after which a session will be terminated.

1

Alarm Limiter Recovery Time (Minutes)

Recovery time (t1): The value for t1 is configurable from 0 (alarm limiter mode disabled) to 1440 minutes (default is 10 min). **

10

** The corresponding alarming configuration is explained in more detail in the following. Alarming configuration with recovery time setting:

When an alarm of a specific type (e. g. Amplifier alarm) from a specific NE is raised by the NE for the first time, and then cleared by the NE (= first red bar / “first alarm” in the illustration above), the ‘Alarm Limiter Recovery Time’ setting does not yet take effect.

This alarm will be raised and cleared in the A.I.M.O.S. Visualization as notified by the according NE via the A.I.M.O.S. southbound interface.

If the same alarm is notified again by the same NE a second time (or several times) after the first alarm was cleared in an interval that is smaller that the recovery time (t1) set (= green bars “1.” –“4.” in the illustration above), the A.I.M.O.S. Visualization will show this condition in two ways:

1. NE-generated alarm: Even if this specific alarm is raised (and cleared) several times in intervals below the recovery time (t1) set, it will be shown in the A.I.M.O.S. Visualization as one single alarm (= second blue bar in the middle line in the illustration above) of this specific alarm type, e. g. Amplifier alarm.

2. Intermittent Alarm generated by A.I.M.O.S.: Additionally, the A.I.M.O.S. Visualization shows an ‘Intermittent Alarm’ (= first blue bar in the bottom line in the illustration above) to inform the user that a series of recurring alarms is visualized as one. This indication also specifies the alarm type concerned.

Page 43: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

5 A.I.M.O.S. Configuration

Page 43

Example:

Clearing the alarms:

1. NE-generated alarm: The alarm actually generated by the NE (due to recurring alarms of the same type) will stay active until the recovery time (t1) set has elapsed without a recurrence of this specific alarm type.

Example: If the default recovery time of 10 minutes is set, the alarm visualization stays active until 10 minutes have elapsed after the last clearance of this alarm by the NE without the alarm recurring again.

Clearing this alarm in advance can be achieved by a manual clear or by an active alarm query.

2. Intermittent Alarm generated by A.I.M.O.S.: The ‘Intermittent Alarm’ will be displayed until it is cleared manually by the user irrespective of the alarm condition notified by the NE.

Once these alarms are cleared, the cycle will start anew (in an according alarm case) as illustrated in the figure on the previous page.

5.1.3 Security

Select Server Configuration Tool / Security (only available for user ‘Admin’ irrespective of the user role assigned) to check or edit Password Settings (see 5.1.3.1), Account Settings (see 5.1.3.2), and (in case a license for LDAP is installed) LDAP Settings (only available if a license for LDAP is installed; see 5.1.3.3).

Page 44: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 44 M0125ANA.DOC

5.1.3.1 Password Settings

As a general restriction, using passwords that may easily be guessed is not allowed. Thus, it will not be possible to use passwords containing for example:

more than three identical characters a series of more than three ascending or descending letters or figures, e.g.

"123", “abc”, etc. a user name, e.g. "admin" or the current user name evident terms, e.g.:

- password or passwort - qwert - azert - aimos

Upper or lower case variations of all the excluded words listed above are not allowed either. Minimum Password Length

Passwords should have a length in the range from 5 to 40 characters. The value in this field specifies how long the password must be at least *. Each password must fulfill this requirement. * for scheduler action ‘Configure Node A User’ as explained in chapter 6.10.3.6 the maximum setting possible is 16 Password Security Level

Use this entry to specify whether passwords must contain certain characters. Numbers, special characters* or a combination of these are possible.

The following levels are available:

* Special characters are !§$%&/{[(<=>)]}\?´^`'"*+~-_.:,;#|@. All country-specific characters such as ä, ö, ü, è, ñ, etc. are not allowed. To avoid accidental usage of such characters make sure that the keyboard layout set in the operating system corresponds to the actual keyboard layout.

A modification in the security level will result in an obligatory password change with the next login if the current password does not match the new regulations. In that case the system will prompt the user to set a new password when he logs in again.

Page 45: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

5 A.I.M.O.S. Configuration

Page 45

Initial Password Durability

This value within a range from 0 to 744 hours sets the length of time the initial password of a newly created account is valid until the first login is required to change the password. When the set period expires before the initial password has been changed, the account is disabled. A value of 0 indicates, that the password will never expire; use this value in order to disable the password expiration facility.

Note: For enabling locked accounts use the Account Manager (see 5.4.4).

Password Durability

This value within a range from 0 to 365 days decides the period of days after which passwords will expire. A value of 0 indicates, that the password will never expire; use this value in order to disable the password expiration facility. If a password has expired, a login is prevented until a new password is assigned.

Password History

This value in a range from 1 to 255 specifies the number of distinguished passwords that must be used before a certain one can be used again. A value of 3 indicates, for example, that three different passwords must have been used in between before a password can be used once again, i.e. the user may have a list of four passwords in circulation.

5.1.3.2 Account Settings

These settings specify the criteria for account lockouts due to invalid login attempts or for user account deactivation after a definable inactivity period. Please observe that the first two settings apply to the Administrator account, as well.

Account Lockout Threshold

This value (3 - 255 is possible) sets the number of invalid login attempts that are allowed before an account (incl. Administrator) is locked out temporarily as specified in the Account Lockout Duration.

Account Lockout Duration

This value sets the length of time (1 - 1440 minutes is possible) an account (incl. Administrator) is locked after the Account Lockout Threshold has been reached.

Permanent Account Lockout Threshold

This value (3 - 255 is possible) sets the number of invalid login attempts that are allowed before an account (excl. Administrator) is disabled. Example: If the Account lockout threshold is set to 5, the Account lockout duration to 30, and the Permanent Account lockout threshold to 6, the according account will be locked after 5 invalid login attempts for 30 minutes before another login attempt is possible. If this fails, too, the number of 6 invalid attempts is reached and the account will be disabled after the next invalid attempt.

Maximum User Account Inactivity (Days)

If an account is not used for the period set in this field, it will be deactivated automatically. Settings from 0 to 365 days are possible; the default value is 90 (setting 0 means the feature is not used, i.e. inactivity of an account will not lead to its deactivation).

Page 46: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 46 M0125ANA.DOC

Notes: - For enabling locked or deactivated accounts use the Account Manager (see 5.4.4). - If Account Lockout Threshold and Permanent Account Lockout Threshold are set to the same value or if the Permanent Account Lockout Threshold is set to a smaller value than the Account Lockout Threshold, only the Permanent Account Lockout Threshold becomes active; i.e. once the set number of allowed invalid login attempts has been reached, the account will be deactivated (thus, in such a constellation the Account Lockout Threshold will be ineffective).

5.1.3.3 LDAP Settings

Use these fields to configure the settings for user management via Windows Active Directory (LDAP). Please observe that these settings are only displayed if an LDAP license is installed.

Before configuring these settings in A.I.M.O.S., LDAP must be configured a follows: The client computer (where AIMOS_Visu.exe is executed) needs to be a member of a domain that is managed by an Active Directory Domain Controller. The LDAP-driven login also requires that the current Windows user is a domain user within the same domain. Within the Active Directory, the user account must be assigned to a global user group that corresponds to one of the A.I.M.O.S. user roles.

The server must support the Active Directory services and the LDAP interface. LDAP must be accessible from the client side; thus the server and client side firewall must allow this.

LDAP Enabled

Use to enable / disable this function on A.I.M.O.S. pages. When activated, the LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) interface synchronizes between the user information base of a LDAP-connected server and the user and role system built into A.I.M.O.S. The server side is typically realized by an instance of the Active Directory (AD) service on a Microsoft Windows Server based computer.

To achieve this, A.I.M.O.S. queries the active directory, using the configured LDAP path, whenever a windows user (i.e. a member of the configured domain) attempts to log on in the AIMOS_Visu program. Please note that this does not happen for a user named "Admin".

In the active directory, the group membership state of the requesting user is queried for groups that are named starting "AIMOS_" (see example below). The group names configured in A.I.M.O.S. are looked up in the list of AD group memberships by putting the text "AIMOS_" in front of each role name found in the AIMOS account manager. Thus, the A.I.M.O.S. role name "Standard User Role" would match an AD group membership of a group exactly named "AIMOS_Standard User Role" etc.:

Page 47: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

5 A.I.M.O.S. Configuration

Page 47

After successfully querying the AD via LDAP, the user information found in the AD is replicated into the A.I.M.O.S. user base and the user group memberships found in the AD is reflected into the role membership.

Moreover, if a user is found to be disabled or non-existing in the AD, this is also replicated into A.I.M.O.S. by disabling this user. By replicating the user and role information into the A.I.M.O.S. user database, a user would still be able to log on to AIMOS_Visu if the AD server would become temporarily unavailable. Note that for a local logon, the user would need to have a known password. As replicated users does not have a password by default (and also an empty password would not be accepted of course), the A.I.M.O.S. Admin would need to assign a password to a replicated user in the Account Manager first, in order to enable such a user to logon without LDAP access.

Note: Please also observe that after the expiration of the LDAP license all users that were created via LDAP will be automatically deactivated. Users explicitly created or changed (e. g. by a new password) by the ‘Admin’ will stay active. All users deactivated due to license expiration will also remain inactive when LDAP is activated again.

LDAP Domain Enter the name of the domain. Only Windows users who are member of this domain can take advantage of the LDAP interface feature.

LDAP Path

Enter the LDAP Path using LDAP URL syntax like this: LDAP://myserver/cn=Users,dc=mydomain,dc=com

LDAP Connect String This is the connect string that used to configure the OLE DB Provider for Microsoft Directory Services. Example that uses an Administrator account from domain “mydomain” to query the server: Provider=ADsDSOObject;User ID=mydomain\Administrator;Password=mypassword;Encrypt Password=True;Mode=Read;Bind Flags=0;ADSI Flag=-2147483648 To configure the connect string, use this example as a template and change the values for the “User ID” and the “Password” fields according to your needs.

Page 48: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 48 M0125ANA.DOC

5.1.3.4 Visualization Login with LDAP

Please observe that LDAP will affect the login to the Visualization, only, if all of the following conditions are fulfilled:

LDAP has been configured correctly

LDAP has been enabled in A.I.M.O.S.

LDAP is available at this computer

an LDAP login to A.I.M.O.S. has been assigned to the user currently logged in to Windows

In that case the login will be as follows:

Instead of the general field for entering the ‘Username’ a choice between the A.I.M.O.S. user "Admin" and the user currently logged in to Windows is provided for this field. If the current Windows user is selected, no password entry is required. (In the examples above the Windows user "Administrator" was logged in.)

5.1.4 SNMP Northbound – Interface Settings

Select Server Configuration Tool / SNMP Northbound.

Notes: For port settings also see Security Whitepaper as explained in chapter 4.1.

The screen shot above includes the SNMPv3-specific fields (listed in section 5.1.4.9). Without SNMPv3 these will not be available.

Page 49: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

5 A.I.M.O.S. Configuration

Page 49

5.1.4.1 Server Port of the A.I.M.O.S. SNMP Agent

The default listening port of a SNMP Agent is 161. In order to avoid conflicts with the Microsoft SNMP Agent, which might be installed on some computers and already using the default port, the A.I.M.O.S. SNMP Agent uses port 163 by default.

If this value is set to the default SNMP Agent port, the Microsoft SNMP Agent must not be installed or must not use port 161; i.e. the file [WinDir]\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS\ETC\SERVICES must not assign port 161 to snmp/udp.

5.1.4.2 Default Port for Outgoing SNMP Traps

With A.I.M.O.S. the SNMP managers which receive an alarm notification in case an alarm arises can be defined. The SNMP managers have to be defined with IP address and IP port. If the IP port is not entered, this default port is used. Path: ServerConfigTool | SNMP Northbound| Default Port for outgoing SNMP Traps; default: 162.

5.1.4.3 Agent Shutdown Delay

If the A.I.M.O.S. SNMP agent is stopped, a shutdown notification for the SNMP manager is sent. Enter a shutdown delay (in seconds). The A.I.M.O.S. SNMP agent will be shut down after this delay, i.e. the A.I.M.O.S. SNMP agent will wait for the acknowledgements of this notification before it is stopped.

5.1.4.4 Length of Generated Community Names

If the SNMP Login is used (via A.I.M.O.S. Login), community names are created by the A.I.M.O.S. SNMP agent. Enter the length of the name in the range of 1 to 40 chars, default is 8 chars.

Note: The longer the name the saver is the connection.

5.1.4.5 Private SNMP Community Name

In case the SNMP Manager is not capable to perform the login process (via A.I.M.O.S. login), a Private Community Name can be entered here. With this private community name full access (administrator rights) to the MIB is allowed. Do not enter a private community name if the SNMP Manager shall use the login process.

5.1.4.6 IP Address of Alternate SNMP Agent

SNMP requests, which are unknown to the A.I.M.O.S. SNMP agent can be forwarded to another SNMP agent. Enter the IP address of this alternative SNMP agent. The default value is IP address 127.0.0.1, i.e. unknown requests are forwarded to the Microsoft SNMP agent running on the same computer like the A.I.M.O.S. SNMP Agent.

Page 50: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 50 M0125ANA.DOC

5.1.4.7 Server Port of Alternate SNMP Agent

SNMP requests, which are unknown to the A.I.M.O.S. SNMP agent can be forwarded to another SNMP agent. Enter the IP port of this alternative SNMP agent. The default value is IP port 161.

5.1.4.8 MIB Supported by the Agent

The A.I.M.O.S. SNMP Agent supports 3 MIBs. Usually the A.I.M.O.S. MIB should be used unless the higher level supervision system requires a specific MIB for reading the alarm table or restarting the alarm synchronization:

If the OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.6408.100.1.3(mRestart) is needed to start the alarm synchronization, OMC3 MIB should be selected.

If Nokia NetAct is used, NE3S MIB should be selected. For Nokia NetAct a separate manual is available via "~\Andrew\AIMOS\MIB\Q0217RHA.pdf" (i.e. in the same directory as the SNMP Interface Description).

Otherwise A.I.M.O.S. MIB should be selected, even if OMC3 Trap Format or Nokia Trap Format is needed. In case of the A.I.M.O.S. MIB any Trap Format can be selected in the A.I.M.O.S. Visualization program, Northbound Manager. If NE3S is selected as "MIB Supported by the Agent", the additional field "Translation Scheme for Nokia DN" is available to choose the name scheme to be used for NEs. Available are Legacy, Improved, or Extended. For more details, refer to the Nokia NetAct manual under "~\Andrew\AIMOS\MIB\Q0217RHA.pdf"

5.1.4.9 SNMPv3-related fields

For customers using SNMPv3 the following additional fields are available:

Supported Security Models and Levels

Security Engine ID

Security Level

User Name

Authentication Algorithm

Authentication Password

Encryption Algorithm

Encryption Password

These are described in detail in the “AIMOS SNMPv3 Configuration Guide” which is provided for customers using this feature. For the location of this guide see section 2.5.5.

Page 51: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

5 A.I.M.O.S. Configuration

Page 51

5.1.5 OMC 3

Note: For port settings also see Security Whitepaper as explained in chapter 4.1.

IP Parameter Description

IP Address of the OMC3 Adapter

Enter the IP address of the PC (or network interface) where the OMC3 adapter is installed.

Server Port of the OMC3 Adapter

Enter the server port of the PC (or network interface) where the OMC3 adapter is installed. The default port is 7421

OMC3 Database File Location

Enter or select path and filename of the OMC3.54 database file.

The OMC3 adapter integrates alarms of repeater systems of the first and second generation, which are supervised by an OMC3.54.

5.1.6 SMTP Mail Server

5.1.6.1 Configuration of Email Forwarding

Select Server Configuration Tool / SMTP.

To make A.I.M.O.S. sending alarm notification emails, you first have to set up the SMTP (Simple Mail Transport protocol) parameters using the Server Configuration tool. The first three parameters (SMTP Server, Server Port and From Address) are obligatory.

1. For the SMTP Server, you can either enter the IP-Address (preferred, if it's a static address) or the host name. Leaving this field blank disables the email function.

2. The Server Port of the SMTP Server defaults to 25, which is most often used.

3. The From Address is the mail address that A.I.M.O.S. should use as a sender address of the emails (e.g. "[email protected]"). It depends on the SMTP Server configuration whether this can be any arbitrary address.

Most SMTP Servers will require this address to correspond to some account data on the server side.

Page 52: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 52 M0125ANA.DOC

The remaining parameters (HELO Name, SASL User Name and Password) are for authentification and need to be adjusted according to the requirements of the SMTP server. Many servers do solely rely on the from-address matching an email account. In this case, these parameters can be left blank.

Please ask the server administrator for details.

Note that "POP-before-SMTP" authentification is not supported.

After changing these parameters the A.I.M.O.S. Connector service must be restarted in order to activate the changes.

Please observe the email status display in the first tab page of the diagnostic dialog that can be opened by double-clicking the A.I.M.O.S. Connector symbol near the clock in the status bar to verify that emailing was activated.

After setting these SMTP parameters, you need to enter email addresses of the users that you want to receive emails. To do so, open the Account Manager in the A.I.M.O.S. Visualization program and enter the email address in the appropriate field of a user record. Also, switch the "Active" check next to the email address field on. You can even enter more than one email address for one user by separating the addresses with a comma. You can monitor the email sending using the A.I.M.O.S._Connector services diagnostic dialog: Change to the Diagnosis tab page and check the "All monitoring enabled" mark. Then select the email tab card. Email activity is logged to the "eMail Errors" and "eMail Monitor" lists.

5.1.6.2 SMTP Server (Host Name or IP Address)

A.I.M.O.S. offers the possibility to send emails in case alarms arise. Enter the SMTP server. Enter the IP address or the Host name.

5.1.6.3 Server Port of the SMTP Server

If a SMTP server is installed, a server port number can be entered, which can differ from the standard server port number (25).

Note: For port settings also see Security Whitepaper as explained in chapter 4.1.

5.1.6.4 From Email Address

Enter a sender address (email address) if necessary.

5.1.6.5 HELO Name

Enter the HELO name if necessary. The Helo name is part of the SMTP protocol. It identifies the SMTP client. Some servers do not accept MAIL requests before HELO. Clients use HELO as the first request in every session. This field is used when A.I.M.O.S. tries to contact a user by mail.

Page 53: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

5 A.I.M.O.S. Configuration

Page 53

5.1.6.6 SASL Login Username

Enter the SASL Username if necessary. Acronym for Simple Authentication and Security Layer. SASL is a method for adding authentication support to connection-based protocols. SASL takes effect when a protocol initiates a command for identifying and authenticating a user to a server. SASL also includes an option for negotiating protection of subsequent protocol interactions. With this option in effect, SASL places a security layer between the protocol and the connection.

5.1.6.7 SASL Login Password

Enter the SASL password if necessary.

5.1.7 SMPP

The Short Message Peer-to-Peer (SMPP) protocol is a telecommunications industry protocol for exchanging SMS messages. The SMPP protocol version supported by A.I.M.O.S. is V3.4.

To use this protocol, a Short Message Service Centre (SMSC) must be reachable from the A.I.M.O.S. server over an IP connection and the SMSC must provide a SMPP account that supports both sending and receiving short messages over a fix phone number. The A.I.M.O.S. Connector acts as a SMPP client while the SMSC is the server. The client role is also referred to as an External Short Message Entity (ESME).

Once the SMPP settings are completed and this service is Enabled (by tagging the according field), a new "virtual modem" named "SMPP-Gateway" will show up in the Connectivity Manager where this virtual modem can be used in communication groups just as regular modems.

Source Address (own Phone No): Enter the phone no. from which the SMS messages will be sent.

The Registered Delivery option can be used to request delivery receipts from the SMSC, which will be included in the log files and can help in troubleshooting.

Page 54: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 54 M0125ANA.DOC

Source Address (own Phone No): Enter the phone no. from which the SMS messages will be sent.

The Registered Delivery option can be used to request delivery receipts from the SMSC, which will be included in the log files and can help in troubleshooting.

Mode: Two modes are available for the SMPP communication. The appropriate mode, like all the other SMPP settings, must be chosen in accordance with the capabilities of the SMSC and the provided SMPP account information.

One-Connection Mode: In this mode, only one TCP/IP connection between ESME and SMSC is used and both sending and receiving of short messages is processed using this single connection. The single connection will be opened in transceiver mode.

Two-Connection Mode: In this mode, two separate TCP/IP connections between ESME and SMSC will be used, one for sending short messages and the second for receiving incoming short messages. Both use the same phone number. The first connection will be opened either in transmitter mode (if Registered Delivery option is switched off) or in transceiver mode (if Registered Delivery is on) while the second connection will operate in receiver mode. Note that in two-connection mode, the two-connection must use different remote port numbers, unless the remote IP addresses are distinct. For entering the data for sending use the fields in the left column, for receiving information use the right one.

Remote IP Address / Port are the address information of the SMSC server side and must be provided, while the Local IP Address / Port settings are optional and usually only required in situations where a firewall is used that needs fixed address information in order to allow communication.

The parameters SystemID, Password, System Type, Type of Number (TON) and Numbering Plan Indicator (NPI) are usually provided by the SMSC server as part of the account information and must be entered accordingly. Note that SystemID is sometimes referred to as "User Name". For some SMSCs, the System Type setting might not be required at all.

Page 55: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

5 A.I.M.O.S. Configuration

Page 55

5.1.8 Housekeeping

Use to set how many days certain data should be saved either on the A.I.M.O.S. server file system or in the A.I.M.O.S. database. Depending on the type of data select to 'Delete database data older than x days' or to 'Delete archive files older than x days'.

The screenshot above shows the preset default values of the parameter x; for the individual value ranges of x refer to the explanations in the following. Watchdog Logs: (see also chapter 9.1.2.7)

a) Delete database data older than x days

not configurable since there are no database data

b) Delete archive files older than x days

The archive files are deleted from the hard disk after the set number of days. The range for x is 1 to 365 days. Checks as to which files have to be deleted are carried out once a day. Connector Logs: (see also 9.1.2.8)

a) Delete database data older than x days

not configurable since there are no database data

b) Delete archive files older than x days

The archive files are deleted from the hard disk after the set number of days. The range for x is 1 to 365 days. Checks as to which files have to be deleted are carried out once a day. SNMP Agent Logs: (see also 9.1.2.11)

a) Delete database data older than x days

not configurable since there are no database data

b) Delete archive files older than x days

The archive files are deleted from the hard disk after the set number of days. The range for x is 1 to 365 days. Checks as to which files have to be deleted are carried out once a day.

Page 56: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 56 M0125ANA.DOC

Alarm History:

a) Delete database data older than x days

Alarms older than x days are deleted from ‘alarm history’ database table and saved as archive files.

The range for x is 1 to 364 days Checks as to which data have to be deleted are carried out once a day. Old alarms are moved / archived into the file in bundles of 100, i.e. 100 alarms

are archived and deleted from database, then, after a pause of some seconds the next 100 alarms are moved, etc. This ensures the archive process is running in the background and does not interfere with operational tasks, even when a very high number of alarms have to be archived.

The ‚Alarm History’ Archive Files thus created are weekly files, i.e. each Monday a new file is created. The file name contains the date of the respective week’s Monday (local time). Into such a weekly file the alarms are moved for one week.

b) Delete archive files older than x days

The archive files are deleted from the hard disk after the set number of days. The range for x is 1 to 365 days. Checks as to which files have to be deleted are carried out each Monday. Performance Data:

See also chapters 6.10.3.4 and 6.16.

a) Delete database data older than x days

Performance data older than x days are deleted from the ‘performance data’ database table (but not archived to a file).

The range for x is 7 to 365 days. Checks as to which data have to be deleted are carried out once a day.

b) Delete archive files older than x days

Only valid / available for Node X performance data csv files.

The files are deleted from the hard disk after the set number of days. The range for x is 7 to 365 days. Checks as to which files have to be deleted are carried out once a day. Schedule Runs: (see also 6.10)

a) Delete database data older than x days

Schedule runs log files are deleted from the database after x days. The range for x is 1 to 30 days. No archive files will be created.

b) Delete archive files older than x days

There are no archive files.

Page 57: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

5 A.I.M.O.S. Configuration

Page 57

5.2 PREFERENCES EDITOR - CUSTOMIZING A.I.M.O.S.

The Preferences Editor is used to customize certain system settings, e.g. alarm settings, the connectivity pages, the tool Scheduler, etc.

When new NEs are created, A.I.M.O.S. uses the Connectivity settings chosen here as default.

Please observe that access to this tool (and the available fields) can be configured in the Account Manager rights as explained in chapter 5.4.2.

StartAll ProgramsAndrew A.I.M.O.S.Visualization.

In A.I.M.O.S. Visualization select Tools / Preferences Editor.

Note: The settings of this tool are effective for all NEs.

The parameters displayed in the Preferences Editor depend on the A.I.M.O.S. configuration. If the tool Scheduler is not licensed, the Alarm Polling parameters will be displayed. With a Scheduler license the Preferences Editor shows the Scheduler parameters, instead.

Page 58: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 58 M0125ANA.DOC

Connectivity: Customize connectivity related settings.

Red marked lines/parameters in the connectivity pages (see chapter 6.9) are an indication that there is an inconsistency between the current connectivity settings of an NE and the settings of the Preferences Editor.

Preferred Notification Type: Select the alarm reporting mode to be used by the NEs ( Field ‘Alarm Type’ of Connectivity page; see section 6.9.5.3). This setting applies only to NEs that use the SNMP protocol for communication, which has been configured when the NE was created (see section 6.5). Notification = unacknowledged mode. Alarm delivery is not reliable, an alarm can get lost along the transmission over the network. Inform = acknowledged mode. Alarm delivery is reliable; every alarm will be retransmitted if necessary until A.I.M.O.S. confirms the delivery. Blank = (empty setting). No preference is set so that the alarm type setting of the NEs will not be checked by A.I.M.O.S. and the parameter will not be marked red in the connectivity pages irrespective of the setting. Note: The alarm notification type of ION-M systems that do not use the SNMP protocol is similar to 'Inform' and

cannot be changed. all SMS-connected NEs is similar to 'Notification' and cannot be changed.

Preferred Packet Switched On Demand Idle TimeOut: The ‘Packet Switched On Demand’ session is initiated by the NE on request by a so called 'Wake-up-SMS'. It will be closed automatically when no communication has taken place for the time interval set as idle timeout. The default setting is 5 minutes.

Expected SMS Response: Specifies the time in minutes the Connector should wait for an SMS response.

Available Connectivity Modes: In the default setting all connection modes are displayed which A.I.M.O.S. can handle. Select the modes from the list which will be useable in your network for connecting NEs. Scheduler: Only available when the tool Scheduler is licensed (see also chapter 6.10 Tool Scheduler (Option)).

Concurrent Network Element Connections: Packet Switched On Demand Packet Switched Always On

Circuit Switched Local Area Network

SMS Dial Server

These settings are used to limit the number of concurrently executed scheduled activities to a reasonable maximum. This limit can be applied individually for each connection type (Circuit Switched, Packet Switched On Demand, etc.). As an effect, no more that the number of scheduled activities specified here will be started in parallel for every single type of connection.

For example, after setting this number to 3 for "Circuit Switched", no more than 3 parallel modem connections to network elements will be started by the scheduler. So this number should not exceed the number of communication resources (i.e. modems) that are available for the respective type of communication. Otherwise, internal contention for the resources might grow and scheduled activities are more likely to fail after a timeout waiting for a resource.

Page 59: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

5 A.I.M.O.S. Configuration

Page 59

Alarm Polling: Alarm Polling parameters are only available when the tool Scheduler is not licensed.

Use to customize the polling settings. How individual NEs are included into Alarm Polling is described in chapter 5.6 Alarm Polling. Alarm Polling Active: Set the check-mark to activate alarm polling. (This parameter can also be set in Configuration General as explained in chapter 5.6.) Time Plan Settings: Select a time interval for polling. Next Run Time: This field indicates the next execution date and time according to the Time Plan Settings with the check-mark enabled. NE: Sequential Delay Seconds: Interval time between pollings of individual network elements. Severity Icons: Customize the colors for each severity level. The NE-icons in the NE Tree and in the supervision will change their color immediately after saving.

Note: If the Map is opened, close and reopen it to adopt the severity colors. Alarm Settings: Auto Recognition: Check the severity levels which shall be recognized automatically in the list box. With activated Auto Recognition, alarms will be transferred from the active alarm list to the alarm history as soon as they have been cleared. If not, each alarm requires an additional manual recognize by an A.I.M.O.S. user.

Note: It is recommended to activate Auto Recognition if alarms are just forwarded and not maintained in A.I.M.O.S. Alarms need not to be recognized in the A.I.M.O.S. database.

Cannot Handle Information Alarms: In some cases it is possible that the customer system cannot handle the alarm severity Information. In this case set the check-mark to treat information as warnings. Alarm Representation

Audible Alarm Notification: Select Control Panel Settings if an audible alarm notification is desired.

Show Alert Box: Display a message box: Settings can be Always, if active alarms are not in view, or Never (= default value).

Show Alert Cause: Settings can be ‘Any new alarm’ or ‘Severity getting worse’.

Show Alarm List in Severity Colors: Tag to show the background colors of the alarm list in Supervision in the colors designated to the levels in Preferences Editor / Severity Icons.

Page 60: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 60 M0125ANA.DOC

Other Settings:

Visual Improvements (prevent gray text): If this option is checked, the display of text is changed as follows to achieve a better contrast:

- lines that are ReadOnly in black font (instead of gray) - changeable lines in bold font (instead of normal font)

Restore Network Element Tree on Visu Start: Checking this option makes the Visualization restoring the Expanded State of all folders in the Network Element Tree.

Legacy Taskbar Representation: Can be set to ON (check-mark set) or OFF (no check-mark) to configure the system as follows:

Legacy Taskbar Representation is ON

Legacy Taskbar Representation is OFF

Taskbar Buttons The task bar provides a button for the Visualization.

Apart from the button for the main window of the Visualization the task bar also provides buttons for each window that is opened.

Windows-Flip-3D (Windows 7 Aero)

Only the main window is displayed.

Every open window is displayed.

Taskbar Thumbnail Preview (Windows 7 Aero)

Only a preview for the main window is displayed.

A preview for each open window is displayed.

Show Visu Log: Set the check-mark to display the tab Log (see chapter 6.8.5) in the functions bar (see chapter 6.8). This feature shows the internal debug logs that are generated by the A.I.M.O.S. Connector Service for the respective NE.

Geographic Position Format: Use the drop-down menu to select the format in which the geographic position shall be displayed.

GPS Position Visualization: Select the format for the GPS position display. Buttons:

Set Default Severity Colors: Click to set the severity colors to the default settings.

NE Configuration Groups: Click to open the NE Configuration Groups window to set or edit Configuration Group profiles, which is also available via menu Tools Profiles (for more details see chapter 6.17.3).

Page 61: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

5 A.I.M.O.S. Configuration

Page 61

5.3 CONNECTIVITY MANAGER - MODEM MANAGEMENT

The basic idea of the Connectivity Manager is

to define communication resource groups assignable to network elements, to present the communication resources available on the A.I.M.O.S. server, to allow parameterization of these resources, to get an overview of the modems displayed at a glance. The modems are

sorted column by column. to maintain the connection settings

Please observe that access to this tool can be configured in the Account Manager rights as explained in chapter 5.4.2.

StartAll ProgramsAndrew A.I.M.O.S.Visualization.

In A.I.M.O.S. Visualization select Tools / Connectivity Manager.

First of all customize the connection settings with this tool.

Red marked lines/parameters in the connectivity pages are an indication that there is an inconsistency between the current connectivity settings of an NE and the settings of the Connectivity Manager.

Page 62: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 62 M0125ANA.DOC

Modem Info: read only; data are readout from the operating system (OS). Interface: Communication port of the modem stored in the device manager of the OS. Name by OS: The name of the modem stored in the device manager of the OS. Modem State: Dynamically updated, displays the current state of the modem. Modem Properties: read only; data are readout from the modem. Incoming Connection: Yes: modem is configured for incoming connections. No: not configured for incoming connections. This has to be set in the operating system. See chapter 13 for more information. SMS Capable: Yes: modem is SMS capable. No: modem is not SMS capable. Wireless Modem: Yes: modem is wireless capable. No: modem is not wireless capable. Modem Settings: Customize the modem settings. Name by User: Optional setting. Customize the name of the modem, used as identification in A.I.M.O.S. As default the OS-internal name of the modem will be displayed. Enabled: Set the checkmark to enable the modem for outgoing connections or SMS. SMS Service Center: Select a profile from the list box. The profiles listed are configured in Profiles / SMSC Profiles. SIM PIN: Insert PIN number if necessary for the initialization of the modem. Init String: Enter the init string if required. Normally the init string is preset and has not to be entered. Reset Command: If required, enter a reset command especially for this modem. Dial Prefix: In case phone number has to be proceeded by a prefix. Phone Number (Data/Voice): Use this phone number of the modem / SIM card to transmit data. Phone Number (SMS): If required enter a phone number for transmitting SMS. If this value is not set, A.I.M.O.S. will use Phone Number Data/Voice. Breather Interval: This is the time until a new call can be established after a previous call (guard time). The default setting is 10 seconds.

Note: Once the SMPP service is enabled (see chapter 5.1.7 SMPP), a new "virtual modem" named "SMPP-Gateway" will show up in the Connectivity Manager. This virtual modem can be used in communication groups just as regular modems. Wireless Status: read only; these settings are only effective for wireless modems. Data are detected from A.I.M.O.S. and read out from the wireless modem. Status Age: Date and time of the last status request. Signal Strength: Signal strength in dBm. Network Provider: Displays the network provider. Other Info: read only. Manufacturer: Read out from the modem, manufacturer of the modem. Software Version: Read out from the modem. SW version of the modem. Dial Up Network Name: Read out from OS. Name assigned to the dial-up connection. Identification: Identification number of the modem, will be generated automatically by the OS.

Page 63: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

5 A.I.M.O.S. Configuration

Page 63

5.3.1 Discover Modems

Click Discover Modems to discover connected modems. A.I.M.O.S. will start directly a modem scan and the progress will be displayed in an information window. New modems connected will be displayed separate columns in the Connectivity Manager. Discover modem can only be executed when all modems are idle.

5.3.2 Modem Groups

It is required to generate modem groups. Click Modem Groups to generate modem groups.

Note: Each SMS modem can operate in CS or SMS mode whether it is assigned to a modem group or not. Due to performance issues it is recommended to use separate modem(s) for CS respective SMS mode.

Modem Groups: Select for each modem group which modem(s) should be included. Name: Assign a name to the modem group. Comment: Additional information. Modem Usage: None: not included in a modem group CS: Circuit switched mode SMS: SMS mode

Page 64: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 64 M0125ANA.DOC

5.3.3 Profiles

Click Profiles to facilitate the configuration of connectivity settings by generating profiles. Each profile contains specific data.

Note: In each profile but SMSC profile specific data can be substituted by <?>. This is helpful if NE-specific access data are required. Click the button Query to insert the substitute <?>. This will cause the query of this parameter on the Connectivity Page of the NE when editing the connection data.

Each profile window provides the following buttons to create new or delete existing profiles and to undo or save the settings made.

The following profiles, which are also accessible via the menu Tools Profiles (see chapter 6.17), can be generated:

5.3.3.1 RAS-in Profiles Incoming remote access profiles have to be configured for the incoming connections from the NEs to A.I.M.O.S.

Name: Assign a name to the RAS-in profile.

Phone number: Insert the phone number of the modem that is enabled for incoming connections (see chapter 5.3 Connectivity Manager - Modem Management). Username: Insert the username to get access to A.I.M.O.S.

Password: Insert the password to get access to A.I.M.O.S.

Page 65: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

5 A.I.M.O.S. Configuration

Page 65

5.3.3.2 Network Element Circuit Switched Profiles

Network Element Circuit Switched Profiles have to be configured to establish connections from A.I.M.O.S. to the NEs.

Name: Assign a name to the NE profile, e.g. the assigned NE type.

Username: Insert the PPP username to get access to the NE.

Password: Insert the PPP password to get access to the NE.

5.3.3.3 Network Element Packet Switched Profiles

Configure the Network Element Packet Switched Profiles for the connection modes 'packet switched always on' or 'packet switched on demand' used in NEs.

Name: Assign a name to the PS profile.

Network Initialization String: Enter the additional init string if required.

Network Access Number: Enter phone number of packed data network.

Authentication User Name: Enter username for packet data connections.

Authentication Password: Enter password for packet data connections.

5.3.3.4 SMS Service Center Profiles

With the SMS Service Center Profiles an SMS service center number will be assigned to modems in A.I.M.O.S. / NE.

SMS Service Center Number: Insert the phone number of the service center.

Name: Assign a name to the SMS profile.

Page 66: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 66 M0125ANA.DOC

5.3.3.5 NE WEB Login Profiles

These profiles serve to set specific login credentials for an NE. They are assigned to an NE via the Configuration / Connectivity tab of the functions bar (see chapter 6.9).

The default Network Element WEB Login Profiles (one per NE type) are factory-set before delivery. These are:

- ION-M Default - ION-B Default

- Node M Default - AMR Default

- Node C Default - MCPA Default

- Node G Default - MRx18 Default

- Node A Default

They will be used if the option <use defaults> is set as WEB-Login Configuration on the Connectivity page of the NE (see section 6.9.5.2)

Parameters can be changed if desired or new profiles can be created:

Name: Assigned name of the profile. Username: Username to login to the according NE.*

Password: Password to login to the according NE.* * For the default usernames and passwords refer to the User’s Manual of the according NE.

Login button of the Web tab:

IF EITHER

the option <use defaults> is set as WEB-Login Configuration on the Connectivity page of the NE (see section 6.9.5.2),

OR

the WEB-Login Configuration on the Connectivity Page of an NE (see section 6.9.5.2) is NOT set to <empty> (i.e. WEB Login credentials have been explicitly set for this NE),

the Web tab of the Configuration page of the functions bar (see Web part in chapter 6.8.2) will display a Login button by which username and password will be entered automatically into the Login dialogue.

In order to prevent such a possibility (either for all NEs or only for certain NE types), delete the corresponding default WEB Login Profile(s). As a result the option <use defaults> will no longer be available on the Connectivity Page, and instead the option <empty> is provided for this NE. The option <empty> indicates that no WEB Login Configuration is present / selected, and consequently, no Login button will be available on the WEB tab of the Visualization.

Page 67: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

5 A.I.M.O.S. Configuration

Page 67

5.4 ACCOUNT MANAGER - USER MANAGEMENT

The user management is configured and edited in the Account menu of A.I.M.O.S. StartAll ProgramsAndrew A.I.M.O.S.Visualization. In A.I.M.O.S. Visualization select Tools / Account Manager.

A right-mouse-click on a user name opens a context-menu for editing the user settings (items depending on user rights / roles; see chapters 5.4.2 & 5.4.3).

When ‘Login using this User’ is chosen, the system will log out of the current Visualization session and open the login screen for the selected user.

When changing a password using this menu (Change Password) please observe the obligatory Security restrictions explained in chapter 5.1.3. If the new password is not accepted, the reason is indicated in the status bar of the dialogue:

A password may be rejected for the following reasons (for information regarding the password requirements see chapter 5.1.3):

Too Short Password is smaller than required minimum password length.

Too Simple Password does not fulfill some basic requirements (e. g. "123456789").

Invalid Password contains invalid signs or does not fulfill the configured PW standard.

Mismatch Password has already been used within the Password History setting.

Please note: A possible temporary lockout will be reset by a password change. If LDAP is enabled (chapter 5.1.3.3), passwords cannot be changed.

Page 68: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 68 M0125ANA.DOC

Regarding user management in the Account Manager please also observe the following:

If LDAP (see chapter 5.1.3.3) is enabled and functioning, users can neither be created nor deleted. Role assignment changes are also not possible. In this case, these functions are taken over by the Windows Server specified in the Server Configuration / Configuration Tool.

The "Initial Password Durability" as specified in chapter 5.1.3 does not apply to the pre-defined user "Admin", which is available after the first installation.

Deleting the pre-defined user "Admin" or the pre-defined "Administrator Role" is not possible.

Name, assigned role, and owner of the pre-defined user "Admin" cannot be changed. Furthermore, it is not possible to deactivate this user via the "Account Manager".

Please observe that access to this tool can be configured in the Account Manager rights as explained in chapter 5.4.2.

Please note: The day displayed in the ‘Most Recent Use’ column is the date when the Visu was used the last time. This information is used by the ‘Maximum User Account Inactivity’ feature (of the Security page in the Server Configuration / Configuration Tool) by which an account can be deactivated after a certain (definable) period of inactivity (for details see chapter 5.1.3.2).

Example: The user 'John Doe' in this scenario has not been logged in since the 20th October 2010 and correspondingly his account was automatically deactivated:

In order to reactivate such an account, set the check mark for 'User Active' in the ‘Edit User’ window (see also section 5.4.4) and it will be ‘Enabled’ again:

Page 69: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

5 A.I.M.O.S. Configuration

Page 69

5.4.1 Organizations

In the Account menu choose Organizations, or click the button Organizations to get the context menu.

Add organizations by clicking the Add button.

Select Country and Organization from the list.

Edit the organization settings if necessary:

MCC, MNC, Organization Code (MCNC), Company Kind, Company Name, and Company Short Name are pre-defined and cannot be changed.

Company Text: Enter additional information (free text). The following values are valid for the SNMP Alarm Forwarding only. Please see chapter 5.5 Northbound Manager (Option) - Trap Forwarding to NMS for additional information.

Page 70: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 70 M0125ANA.DOC

Language: Select the preferred language to be used for A.I.M.O.S. alarm messages.

Time Format: Select the time format to be used, either the Local Time of the database server or UTC (Coordinated Universal Time).

Alarm Forwarding: Select the alarm forwarding format, either None (no formatting), SNMP V1 or SNMP V2C.

Active Workshift: Select the Active Workshift.

Auto Recognition Severities: Use to select severities for which no manual recognition is required. Alarms with severity levels that are selected in this field will be recognized automatically.

RDN Separator: Enter the RDN Separator. Default is equal '='.

RDN Concatenator: Enter the RDN Concatenator. Default is comma ','.

CC Concatenator: Enter the CC Concatenator. Default is comma ','.

RDN Translation: Enter the RDN Translation (Replace strings in alarm messages).

Manage Params in Alarm List / History: Set the check-mark to activate the display of these parameters in the alarm list: Param Count, Param 1, Param 2, Param 1 Value, Param 2 Value, Param 1 Unit 1 and Param 2 Unit . To avoid a performance decrease of the database the detection and transmission of these parameters is disabled by default. The columns will be blank in the alarm list / history. Note: This feature will be initialized after a restart of the A.I.M.O.S. visualization.

Alarm History Initial Size Limit: The alarm history display size (i.e. the number of alarms displayed) is limited to this setting to avoid performance decrease of the Visualization. The default value is 5000. Set the value in intervals of 500. Set the value 0 to get all alarms listed. Note: This feature will be initialized after a restart of the A.I.M.O.S. visualization.

Legacy Trap Info in SNMP Traps: (currently no longer provided in this tool) Setting up to SW V2.2: AlarmTraps contain 4 Trap Info fields: - aimosCustomerMasterInfo: contains Trap Info of all NEs, apart from optical

systems: For those the Trap Info of the Master Controllers will be displayed. - aimosCustomerRemotInfo: contains Trap Info of Remote Units - aimosCustomerSubRackInfo: contains Trap Info of SubRacks - aimosCustomerCableInfo: is not implemented. From SW V2.3 onwards: Trap Info will be forwarded always to aimosCustomerMasterInfo, the other 3 Trap Info fields leave blank. Click the check-mark to get the previous practice. Note that this will decrease the performance of the database.

aimosAlarmLogTable Limit (A.I.M.O.S.MIB): The alarm log table size is limited to this setting to avoid performance decrease of the database. Default value is 1000. The last 1000 alarms of the alarm history are displayed. Set the value 0 to get all alarms listed.

Page 71: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

5 A.I.M.O.S. Configuration

Page 71

5.4.2 Account Manager Rights

In A.I.M.O.S. Visualization select Tools / Account Manager.

In the Account menu choose from the context menu Roles.

Click Roles to get the context menu Roles Overview (displayed to the right) or use the buttons.

All roles are displayed. Access rights (read and/or write access rights) can be maintained easily by using roles. Please note: No user can change his own rights. To revoke rights e.g. from pre-defined administrator role, please create a new role with "Account Management" rights and log in with a user attached to this role. Click Insert to add a role.

Page 72: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 72 M0125ANA.DOC

Enter the name of the role

and

check the checkbox behind the respective right to grant the access right (Read or Write) for the role.

Carry out a re-login for the changes to take effect.

The first set of rights in the list are for the use of A.I.M.O.S..

Rights preceded by "OMC3-" are OMC3 rights (for the use of an integrated OMC3). The OMC3 Adapter has to be installed. For a detailed explanation of the OMC3 rights refer to manual M0042AJA, chapter 11.9.

With no OMC installed, only the rights for A.I.M.O.S. will be displayed.

The following tables show the actions, tools, menus, or tabs that will be affected by the according (A.I.M.O.S.) right

Note: The common features Tree, Help, and Info are available irrespective of any right.

Page 73: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

5 A.I.M.O.S. Configuration

Page 73

Only if the according Read and Write rights in the following table are granted, the corresponding features listed are available without any restriction:

Read & Write Available feature Accessible via Chapter Tool Account Manager Menu Tools 5.4 Import new Organizations… Menu File 6.2.1

Account Management

NE Owner Profiles Tool Profiles 6.17.2 Alarm Clear Manual Clear

Alarm Delete Manual Delete

Right mouse click on alarm, or Menu Extras, or Supervision tab (> Alarm History)

6.2.5 6.8.1 6.8.1.1

Configuration tab Functions bar Get GPS Position Show updated GPS Position …

GPS Position button / NE Operation

6.8.2

NE Configuration Group Profiles Tool Profiles 6.17.3 External Tool Profiles Tool Profiles 6.17.6 Set Time Reboot Send Service Center Number * Send Configuration * Set Factory Default * Finish Installation Read Unique System

Network Element Operation

6.7

Tool Preferences Editor 1) Menu Tools 5.2 Check Detected Channels 2) Uncheck All 2)

HW/RF tab: Cell Allocation

Check Unused Channels 2) Check Sequence of Channels 2) Uncheck Sequ. of Channels 2) Uncheck All 2)

HW/RF tab: Mobile Allocation

6.8.2

NSOG Filter New… 3) NSOU Filter New… 3)

Functions bar 6.8.2

Configuration

Rename (of a component name) Menu Tree or 4) 6.2.3 Tool Connectivity Manager Menu Tools 5.3

Connectivity Management

SMS Center Profiles A.I.M.O.S. RAS-in Profiles NE Circuit Switched Profiles NE Packet Switched Profiles NE WEB Login Profiles

Menu Tools > Profiles 6.17.1

Log Management

Tool Log Manager / Log Files / Log Profiles / Clear / Log Options

Menu Tools Tool Log Manager

6.13

Maintenance tab / Change Description / Delete

Functions bar 6.8.3 Maintenance

Restore NE Operation 6.7 * SMS-connected NE only

1) Restrictions to certain sections / features possible depending on other rights see other entries in table(s);

2) Node G only 3) ION only 4) right-mouse click in NE Tree

Page 74: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 74 M0125ANA.DOC

Read & Write Available feature Accessible via Chapter Tool Map Menu Tools 6.14

Map Assign Map to Folder Delete Map from Folder Remove from Map

Menu Tree 6.2.3

Northbound Management

Tool Northbound Manager Menu Tools 5.5

Tool Performance Manager Menu Tools 6.16 Performance Manager Alarm Profiles Tool Profiles 6.17.4 Reporting Export Profiles Tool Profiles 6.17.5 Scheduler Tool Scheduler Menu Tools 6.10

Supervision

Recognize Recognize all Alarms Import new Alarms

Menu Extras or Functions bar > tab Supervision

6.2.5 6.8.1

New Rename (of a folder) Move Delete

Menu Tree or right-mouse click in NE Tree

6.2.3 Topology

Drag & drop an NE to Map 6.14 Watchdog Tool Watchdog Menu Tools 6.15

Additionally, all of the unrestricted features in the following tables are available as well. If the according Read rights in the following table are granted, the corresponding features listed are available – generally on a read-only basis; features that are available without restriction are marked 1):

Read Available feature Accessible via Chapter Tool Account Manager Menu Tools 5.4 Account

Management NE Owner Profiles Tool Profiles 6.17.2 Configuration tab with all subordinate tabs, except ‘Web’ tab GPS Position button

Functions bar 6.8.2

NE Configuration Group Profiles Tool Profiles 6.17.3 Insert / Edit / Delete Notes tab 6.8.4 Get Time 1) Query All 1) Export NE Data to 1) XML-Import File 1) NE Configur. Group Profiles 1) Try Connection 1) Read Network Structure 1) Read HID 1) Get Service Center Number 1)

( SMS-connected NE only)

Network Element Operation

6.7

Nokia Specific Problem 1) Menu View 6.2.4

Configuration

Tool Preferences Editor Menu Tools 5.2

Page 75: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

5 A.I.M.O.S. Configuration

Page 75

Read Available feature Accessible via Chapt. Tool Connectivity Manager Menu Tools 5.3 Connectivity section of tool Preferences Editor

Menu Tools 5.2

Connectivity Management

SMS Center Profiles A.I.M.O.S. RAS-in Profiles NE Circuit Switched Profiles NE Packet Switched Profiles NE WEB Login Profiles

Menu Tools > Profiles

6.17.1

Job Monitor Tool Job Monitor 1) Menu Tools 6.12 Tool Log Manager Menu Tools 6.13 ‘Show Visu Log’ entry in tool P.E. 1) Tool Pref. Editor 5.2 Log tab 1) Functions bar 6.8.5

Log Management

Logging Enabled 1) Menu Tree 6.2.3 Maintenance tab Functions bar 6.8.3 Backup 1) NEO / Button 6.7 Maintenance Export to file 1) Menu File 6.2.1 Tool Map Menu Tools 6.14

Map Locate in Map 1) Show Map 1)

Menu Tree 6.2.3

Network Element List

Tool Network Element List 1) Menu Tools 6.11

Northbound Management

Tool Northbound Manager Menu Tools 5.5

Tool Performance Manager Menu Tools 6.16 Performance Manager Alarm Profiles Tool Profiles 6.17.4

Supervision tab 6.8.1 Maintenance tab 6.8.3 Log tab 6.8.5 HID / Inventory Data 6.8.3 Alarm History 6.8.1.1 Notes tab

Reporting Excel Export button 1)

Tool Pref. Editor 6.8.4 Tool Scheduler Menu Tools 6.10

Scheduler Scheduler section of tool P.Editor 1) Tool Pref. Editor 5.2

Supervision tab 6.8.1 Display of Alarms 1)

Alarm Settings 6.8.2

Auditory Alarm Notifications 1) Menu Extras 6.2.5 5.10

Query Alarms… 1) NEO 6.7

Alarm Help 1) Supervision tab Menu ?

6.8.1.2 6.2.7

Standard View 1) Menu View NSO View 1) Menu View 6.2.4

Supervision

Severity Icons / Alarm Settings / Alarm Representation (sections of tool Pref. Editor) 1)

Preferences Editor 5.2

Topology Read right alone w/o effect; Write right required; see previous table

Additionally, all features granted without any right (next table) are available as well.

Page 76: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 76 M0125ANA.DOC

Even if none of the rights are granted, some features are nevertheless available on a read-only basis. However, none of the actions / tools in the previous tables will be available.

Available feature Accessible via Chapter

“General” tab of Configuration tab Functions bar 6.8.2

‘Notes’ tab (except functions Insert, Edit, Delete) Functions bar 6.8.4

Note: The common features Tree, Help, and Info are available irrespective of any right.

5.4.3 Account Manager Roles

Roles can be assigned to users in the 'Edit User' menu of the Account Manager. A role is a profile with defined access rights. By default three roles are pre-defined:

5.4.3.1 The Administrator Role

The administrator role is a pre-defined profile. These users have full read and write access rights to the database. Only users with the "Administrator Role" assigned are allowed to start the Sever Configuration (see chapter 5.1).

5.4.3.2 The Standard User Role

The standard user is a pre-defined user with read rights and the rights to control the alarm system and the device parameters.

5.4.3.3 The Read Only User Role

The read only user is a predefined user with read access rights only.

Page 77: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

5 A.I.M.O.S. Configuration

Page 77

5.4.4 Account Manager Users

A.I.M.O.S. is delivered with a pre-installed user account "Admin". After the login to A.I.M.O.S., user accounts for A.I.M.O.S. can be created, edited or deleted.

In A.I.M.O.S. Visualization select Tools / Account Manager.

Start the Account Manager and select Account - Insert user or the button Insert. Enter the data for the new user. Please observe that the user name does not distinguish between small and capital letters, i.e. "admin" equals "AdMin", etc.

Set an 'Expiry Date' to limit the validity of an account up to a certain date: in this example the user 'Contractor' will no longer be able to login from 1st January 2014 owards. Reactivating such an account is possible by deleting or extending the 'Expiry Date', and by setting the ‘User Active’ check mark.

For a description of the SNMPv3-specific fields (as listed in section 5.1.4.9) refer to the “AIMOS SNMPv3 Configuration Guide” provided for customers using this feature (location see section 2.5.5).

Page 78: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 78 M0125ANA.DOC

Select the Organization. Only activated organizations can be selected. To activate other organizations click Other....

Select the organization from the list and confirm the selection.

Check the Enabled box (default: checked). If the 'Enabled' box for the user is unchecked, the user has no access to the database. With this box a user can temporarily be granted access to / excluded from the database.

Note: Please observe that this option can also be used to enable permanently locked user accounts.

Enter the User Name of the new user account. Using very short names is not recommended, since this will make it harder to find a valid password due to the strict security rules for A.I.M.O.S. (see chapter 5.1.3.1).

Enter the User Text: Enter comments.

Select the Assigned Role or click New... to create a new role.

Select the Assigned Folder to restrict the access for the user to the selected folder. Leave folder [Root] to give access to all maintained NEs.

Select Assigned NE Owner to assign a certain NE Owner Profile (see chapter 5.4.5) to the user. Then, the user will only see NEs assigned to this specific profile.

Enter additional information for the new user:

Phone Number: Enter the phone number of the user.

eMail Alarm Forwarding: If the user is supposed to receive alarm messages via eMail, check the 'Enabled' box and make a selection in the next field.

eMail Alarm Severities: Only alarms of the selected severity levels from the list provided will be sent out. With the setting ‘None selected’ no alarms will be sent.

eMail: Enter the eMail address of the user to where the alarms should be sent.

SMS Alarm Forwarding: If the user is supposed to receive alarm messages via SMS, check the 'Enabled' box and make a selection in the next fields.

SMS Modem Group: Choose the modem (type) to be used for alarm forwarding. Observe that no alarms can be sent out if this selection is not made (setting ‘empty’).

SMS Alarm Severities: Only alarms of the selected severity levels from the list provided will be sent out. With the setting ‘None selected’ no alarms will be sent.

SMS: Enter the SMS account number of the user to where the alarms should be sent.

The initial password 'start' is assigned to the new user account and has to be changed by the user after the first login.

Page 79: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

5 A.I.M.O.S. Configuration

Page 79

5.4.5 NE Owner

To each NE an individual NE Owner can be assigned. Alarms of individual NEs can be sent to different specified destinations via the SNMP Northbound Interface using the 'NE Owner' setting.

All organizations specified for the according country in A.I.M.O.S. by default can be selected as 'NE Owner' via Identification in the Configuration / General tab (see also chapter 6.8.2).

To view the 'NE Owner Profiles' or to create a new 'NE Owner', click the NE Owner button in the Account Manager. This profile is also accessible via the menu Tools Profiles. (see chapter 6.17). When the button New is clicked a new column will be added at the end of the table to enter the data for the new NE Owner:

These settings must be saved and then the new 'NE Owner' can also be selected in the Configuration / General tab (see chapter 6.8.2).

In Tools/Northbound Manager specify to which destination (IP address) the alarms of an individual NE (or NE owner) should be sent (see chapter 5.5.3).

5.4.6 Import / Export

For the user "admin", the ‘Account’ menu of the Account Manager also provides the features Export and Import. Export: Use to export all roles and users in an "Account Configuration Data File". This is an A.I.M.O.S.-specific file format ending on "acd", which cannot be changed.

Please note:

Neither the settings in "Organizations" and "NE Owner" nor passwords will be exported.

An export made with SW V2.6.1 or older cannot be imported into SW V2.7 or later versions.

This feature is not connected to the Export button (for Excel exports of user data) described in the next chapter.

Import: Use to import all roles and users from an "Account Configuration Data File". Please note:If a role or user with the same name as an already existing one is

imported, possible settings that were already made for this user or role will be overwritten.

Users added in this way must be enabled manually after the import is complete.

Page 80: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 80 M0125ANA.DOC

Since passwords are not imported, the initial password "start" is required again for the first login, which should be done within the period set for the ‘Initial Password Durability’ in the Server Configuration / Configuration Tool (see chapter 5.1.3.1 Password Settings).

No users or roles will be deleted by the import procedure. An import is not organization-specific. The user "admin" will not be deactivated or changed by an import.

5.4.7 Excel Export

Use the (Excel-)Export button of the Account Manger in order to save all user data as an Excel file. This button can be made available to all users and is not connected to the Export feature of the Account menu described in the previous chapter.

Page 81: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

5 A.I.M.O.S. Configuration

Page 81

5.5 NORTHBOUND MANAGER (OPTION) - TRAP FORWARDING TO NMS

The Northbound SNMP Manager offers the possibility of setting the addresses of the Network Management Systems (NMS) which are to receive SNMP Alarm Traps.

Access to this tool can be configured in the Account Manager rights as explained in chapter 5.4.2.

StartAll ProgramsAndrew A.I.M.O.S.Visualization.

In A.I.M.O.S. Visualization select Tools / Northbound Manager.

If the mask is started for the first time, it looks as follows:

The page is divided in two parts:

- SNMP Manager see section 5.5.1

- Workshift see section 5.5.2

5.5.1 SNMP Manager

Menu / Buttons

Insert a new SNMP Manager.

Edit the selected SNMP Manager ( see section 5.5.3)

Delete the selected SNMP Manager.

Test-Trap Send a Test-Trap to test the connection to the SNMP Managers. Columns: Double-clicking on a field will open the ‘Edit SNMP Manager’ window for the selected SNMP Manger. ID

This column contains an internal unique identifier of each SNMP Manager. Its values are set by the program. IP Address

This column holds the IP Address of the SNMP Managers which is to receive SNMP Alarm Traps. If the SNMP Manager does not expect to receive SNMP Traps at the 'Default Port for Outgoing SNMP Traps' specified by the A.I.M.O.S. Configuration Tool (see chapters 5.1 & 5.1.4.2), another specific IP port number may be specified by appending a colon and the IP port number (e.g. 192.168.0.1:164).

Page 82: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 82 M0125ANA.DOC

Name

This column provides the possibility to specify a name for the SNMP Manager entry helping to disclose its identity. This name should be unique. If you left the name empty, A.I.M.O.S. tries to discover the IP Addresses DNS name. This may take up to a few seconds. If this fails, the IP Address itself will be used as name, too. Interface Type

In this column define the kind of alarm forwarding. Keep the set default value unless you want to force the SNMP Agent to use an older type of alarm forwarding for compatibility reasons or if your SNMP Manager requires the traps to be in the format specified by the Nokia Enhanced SNMP Solution Suite (NE3S).

The alarms sent away are always SNMPv2 notifications.

A.I.M.O.S. alarm forwarding as defined by the A.I.M.O.S.-MIB. The decision made by means of the setting 'Alarm Forwarding' within the Account Manager determines whether an alarm is sent away as SNMPv1 trap or as SNMPv2 notification.

The meanings of the values are:

MIBDefault currently the same as A.I.M.O.S.

OMC3Default alarm forwarding as used in OMC V3.54 with the standard interface. The alarms sent away are always SNMPv1 traps.

OMC3Nokia alarm forwarding as used in OMC V3.54 with the Nokia interface. The alarms sent away are always SNMPv1 traps.

NE3S alarm forwarding as defined in the Nokia Enhanced SNMP Solution Suite (NE3S). The decision made by means of the setting 'Alarm Forwarding' within the Account Manager determines whether an alarm is sent away as SNMPv1 trap or as SNMPv2 notification.

A.I.M.O.S. Obsolete should not be used unless otherwise notified.

GPS Position Format

Choose the trap format for the GPS position information from the list provided in the ‘Edit SNMP Manager’ window.

Page 83: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

5 A.I.M.O.S. Configuration

Page 83

Time Display Format

This column is used in order to indicate of how date and time values are encoded and transmitted by the A.I.M.O.S. SNMP Agent in traps/notifications. The MIB SNMPv2-TC defines the textual convention DateAndTime, which serves as basis for the formats offered in A.I.M.O.S.

It is defined as follows: A date-time specification.

Field Octets Contents Range 1 1-2 year 0..65536 2 3 month 1..12 3 4 day 1..31 4 5 hour 0..23 5 6 minutes 0..59 6 7 seconds; (use 60 for leap-second) 0..60 7 8 deci-seconds 0..9 8 9 direction from UTC '+' / '-' 9 10 hours from UTC 0..11 10 11 minutes from UTC 0..59

For example, Tuesday May 26, 1992 at 1:30:15 PM EDT would be displayed as: 1992-5-26,13:30:15.0,-4:0.

If only local time is known, time zone information (fields 8-10) is not present.

In general, A.I.M.O.S. provides three date and time formats:

1. SNMP:

This format uses the Textual Convention DateAndTime mentioned above.

2. OSI:

This format is identical to the previous one except

- the deci-seconds are omitted and

- if no time zone information is present (i.e. the UTC Time Format is used),

the direction from UTC contains the character 'Z' and the subsequent values are not used.

3. Windows:

Date and time values are formatted as defined in the windows country settings.

The short date format and the long time format, separated by a blank, is used.

Both, the OSI and the SNMP Format, may be transmitted in three ways:

1. Binary The values are encoded as defined in the MIB. Thus, the year needs two octets (bytes), the month one... This format requires the smallest amount of memory.

2. Text If a SNMP Management System has difficulties to decode the date and time values, we offer an ASCII format. Each digit will use one octet (byte).

3. Formatted This format is the same like text appended by formatting characters like minus, comma and colon.

Page 84: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 84 M0125ANA.DOC

ACK Capability

This column is provided in order to state the SNMP Manager’s ability to perform an acknowledgement.

If this column is checked, the SNMP Agent expects an acknowledgement for each trap sent out. Each trap will be periodically re-sent until acknowledgement is detected.

By default, ‘ACK Capability’ is unchecked and cannot be checked by a user due to the high risk of misconfiguration. In case the SNMP manager is not available or not configured correctly, a strong A.I.M.O.S. overall performance degradation could be the result when each alarm trap is re-sent periodically.

Furthermore, the acknowledgement of each alarm trap is, generally, not a vital feature as the A.I.M.O.S. SNMP agent and SNMP manager are usually within the same LAN with very limited risk of lost traps. In cases where the ‘ACK Capability’ is indeed required, it is possible to activate it via a WIN registry key. Please contact [email protected].

Recognize Trap

The A.I.M.O.S. SNMP Agent may run in one of four predefined modes. This can be setup by means of the A.I.M.O.S. Configuration Tool.

In case the SNMP Agent operates either in

A.I.M.O.S. Default Mode (‘MIB supported by the Agent’ is set to ‘AIMOS Default’)

or in

NE3S Mode (‘MIB supported by the Agent’ is set to ‘Nokia Enhanced SNMP Solution Suite’)

the ‘Trap on Recognition’ feature is supported.

In that case you may check or uncheck the option ‘Recognize Trap’. If checked, each recognition of an alarm forces the SNMP Agent to raise a particular trap (A.I.M.O.S.-MIB: aimosAlarmRecognized / NE3S: noiAlarmAckStateChanged).

Enabled

If this column is not checked, this SNMP Manager will be excluded from Alarm Distribution.

Page 85: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

5 A.I.M.O.S. Configuration

Page 85

5.5.2 Workshift Assignment

A.I.M.O.S. is shipped with one default workshift. If you want to use the workshift facility, you should add at least one additional workshift.

This will be done by selecting Workshift Insert from the menu. In the following window you have to assign a name. If you want to have the heartbeat feature enabled, you have to specify the interval in minutes here.

Insert a new Workshift.

Activate a Workshift.

Edit the selected Workshift.

Delete the selected Workshift.

After that you may want to change the name of the default workshift (Menu Workshift, Edit, Default Workshift) and the heartbeat interval as well.

Please note: An active workshift cannot be deleted. In order to specify the recipient of traps in dependence of the time, proceed as follows:

In the Northbound Manager, select the Default Workshift by a right-mouse click on the field highlighted in blue and select ‘Create Activation Script Files’ from the context menu:

Page 86: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 86 M0125ANA.DOC

Select the desired directory,

(recommended is ‘AIMOS’), and click OK to create the activation files for all workshifts.

This is confirmed by the following message:

To activate a workshift, configure the Windows Scheduler to execute the corresponding activation file. Observe that for each workshift a separate activation has to be executed in the Windows Scheduler.

5.5.3 NE Owner

Use the Edit button to specify to which destination (IP address) the alarms of an individual NE or NE Owner should be sent (for more information on NE Owners see chapter 5.4.5).

For a description of the SNMPv3-specific fields (as listed in section 5.1.4.9) which are not shown in the screen shot above refer to the “AIMOS SNMPv3 Configuration Guide” provided for customers using this feature (location see section 2.5.5).

Page 87: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

5 A.I.M.O.S. Configuration

Page 87

5.6 ALARM POLLING

Use the alarm polling as an additional diagnostic feature. While alarm polling is activated, A.I.M.O.S. contacts the designated NEs and reads out the alarms of the NEs.

Note: - Currently alarm polling is only supported for NEs that are connected via LAN or a packet switched always on network. - Once the Scheduler tool is licensed, alarm polling is available in the

Scheduler only. For details about alarm polling in the Scheduler please see chapter 6.10 Tool Scheduler (Option).

This chapter describes how individual NEs are included into Alarm Polling. Please observe that the Alarm Polling settings can be customized in the Preferences Editor as described in chapter 5.2.

StartAll ProgramsAndrew A.I.M.O.S.Visualization.

Step 1: Select the NE which shall be included in the alarm polling in the NE Tree. In the example below a Node A is selected.

Step 2: Select Configuration / General.

Step 3: In the Settings section set the check-mark for ‘Include in Alarm Polling‘ to configure alarm polling for this NE:

(The parameter ‘Alarming Enabled’ is not relevant for Alarm Polling; for details about this parameter see chapter 6.2.3 Tree.)

Step 4: Repeat Steps 2 to 4 for each NE to be scheduled for alarm polling.

Step 5: To activate Alarm Polling either move to OMC level and set the check mark for 'Alarm Polling Active' or activate it in the Preferences Editor where the settings can additionally be customized (see chapter 5.2).

Note: On NE level, the parameter 'Alarm Polling Active' cannot be changed. It shows whether alarm polling has already been activated. If it is not yet tagged, activate Alarm Polling on OMC level or in the Preferences Editor. Either way Alarm Polling activation is effective for all NEs scheduled for alarm polling.

Alarm polling is not activated Alarm polling is activated

Page 88: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 88 M0125ANA.DOC

5.7 INTEGRATION OF OMC 3.54 Please observe that OMC 3.54 has to prepared (before A.I.M.O.S. is installed) as explained in chapter 4.1.1 Preparation of OMC 3.54 for the Combined Installation with A.I.M.O.S..

The integration of an Andrew OMC 3.54 is optional and required with repeaters of the 1st and 2nd generation.

Note: For the connection to the OMC 3.54 the optional OMC3 Adapter has to be installed (see chapter 4.2 A.I.M.O.S. Setup).

From that point every alarm of a 1st & 2nd generation repeater is automatically forwarded via the OMC3 Adapter. An Andrew OMC 3.54 can be created in each folder.

In A.I.M.O.S. Visualization select the OMC entry in the NE Tree with a right-mouse click and choose New -> Add OMC 3.54.

The Andrew OMC 3.54 has to be installed at the same PC where A.I.M.O.S. is installed, the IP-Address is 127.0.0.1 (Local host), the port is 7421.

Click the Save button to save the entry in the A.I.M.O.S. database and button 'Try connection' for test purpose. Click Next.

Click Get to import the unique identifier for the OMC 3.54. Click Next.

Click Get to import the complete topology maintained by the Andrew OMC 3.54. Click Close to finish the wizard.

The optional OMC3 Adapter service integrates an OMC 3.54 for 1st and 2nd generation repeaters into A.I.M.O.S. The customization for this tool has to be made within the 'Server Configuration' tool (Start - Programs - Andrew A.I.M.O.S. - Server Configuration). For details see chapter 5.1.5 and the online help of the A.I.M.O.S. Server Configuration / Configuration Tool (chapter 5.1).

5.8 DATABASE EXPORT / ODBC

With an installed ODBC driver data queries from the A.I.M.O.S. database can be made via Excel.

The installation and use of the ODBC Export is described in a separate manual, contained in the ‘Manual’ folder of the A.I.M.O.S. Installation CD-ROM.

Page 89: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

5 A.I.M.O.S. Configuration

Page 89

5.9 AUTOMATIC BACKUP

A script-based automatic backup/restore of the A.I.M.O.S. database (as described in chapters 7.1 and 7.2) can be installed with the Windows task scheduler:

The installation and use of the automatic backup feature is described in a separate manual (M0125B6), which is contained in the 'Manual' folder of the A.I.M.O.S. Installation CD-ROM.

5.10 AUDITORY ALARM NOTIFICATIONS

This feature is accessible in the A.I.M.O.S. Visualization via menu Extras (see chapter 6.2.5).

It can be used to assign individual sounds depending on the respective severity level to the alarm notifications.

Page 90: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 90 M0125ANA.DOC

For your notes:

Page 91: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 91

6 A.I.M.O.S. - OPERATIONS

6.1 NE MANAGEMENT - OVERVIEW

In the main program window the complete functionality of A.I.M.O.S. is available at one mouse-click. Each single function is arranged in a functionality-structured group. The NE Tree gives a complete and detail-adjustable overview of all NEs contained in the maintained network. The NE-specific functions are logically structured underneath unique tabs. All information for single NEs or for the complete system hierarchy is given in the Management Interface. Possible changes of settings are highlighted and can be recognized at a glance. Menu Bar

With the menus in the menu bar the main functionality of the program can be customized. NE Tree

The NE Tree displays the structure and the NEs of the supervised network. With the NE Tree the selection of the managed network level and NE is made.

Page 92: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 92 M0125ANA.DOC

Functions

The Functions bar offers the selection of the respective functionality available for each NE selected with the NE Tree. Management Interface

The Management Interface is the Input/Output and information panel for the user. Status Bar

The Status Bar displays the following information on selections made in the user interface:

IP address database

User name

License information

Progress bar

Shows active or inactive CAPS, NUM, SCROLL, INSERT

Skin / Selected appearance

Alarm Status

The Alarm Status gives an overview of the alarms of the selected level/network element.

6.2 MENUS This chapter provides a short summary of each main menu. The available menu items / submenus depend on the NE selected in the NE Tree as well as on the tab selected in the Functions Bar. For the following examples an ION MC with tab Supervision was selected; if another type of NE or another tab is selected, less menu items / submenus may be available. This chapter only describes those submenus in detail which are not explained further in later section of the manual.

The icons to the right of the menu bar provide shortcuts to the submenus of the Tools menu (see section 6.2.2).

Page 93: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 93

6.2.1 File

Excel-Export: Depending on the tab selected in the Functions Bar (see chapter 6.8) the according data can be saved as Excel file. This is also possible via the Excel Export button of the according tab. Access can be configured in the Account Manager (chapter 5.4.2). Export NE Data to XML-Import File: Select to export NE data (of all NEs in A.I.M.O.S. except OMC3) from the A.I.M.O.S. database into a re-importable xml file.

Please note: It is possible that coded passwords might be exported, as well. Thus, the generated file should be protected, i.e. it should not be freely available. Although the actual password text is not exported, the information provided could be used to create, change, or take over the units.

After entering the desired filename in the “Save to XML file” window. such a file can be used for xml file import with the Tool Scheduler (Option); see chapter 6.10.2.

Confirm with OK.

Page 94: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 94 M0125ANA.DOC

Export Node G Frequency to XML-Import File: Select to export Node G frequency data from the A.I.M.O.S. database into a re-importable xml file. For procedure, see description of “Export NE Data to XML-Import File” in the above.

Export to File: Saves an NE backup (generated in A.I.M.O.S.) into a hard disk file, which can be used for a restore on an ION MC. For this restore, however, the file must be copied to the ION MC. The restore cannot be done via A.I.M.O.S. directly, but it is possible to access the ION web page via the Web tab of the A.I.M.O.S. Configuration page; see chapter 6.8.2. Please also observe that the file generated by this backup cannot be used for an xml import via the tool Scheduler.

Save As: Use to save a web page as file.

Delete: Deletes an NE backup file (generated in A.I.M.O.S.) from the hard disk.

Update: Access to this menu can be configured in the Account Manager (chapter 5.4.2). Choose ‘Import new Organizations…’ to add a supplementary organization via

xml file. Choose ‘Import new Alarms…’ to update alarm data via xml file, e. g. after the

update of an NE, without having to update A.I.M.O.S. Please observe that after a successful alarm update all visualizations have to be restarted in order for the changes to take effect.

Both updates will be confirmed as follows:

“processed” is the total number of alarms checked “inserted“ is the number of new alarms “updated" are alarms where the text has changed (alarm text or description) “failed” are alarms where a failure occurred during import

Change Login…: Choose to login with a new user name.

Exit Application: The current Visualization will be closed.

Page 95: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 95

6.2.2 Tools

Tool see chapter Preferences Editor 5.2 Connectivity Manager 5.3 Scheduler (option) 6.10 Account Manager 5.4 Northbound Manager (option) 5.5 Network Element List 6.11 Log Manager 6.13 Job Monitor 6.12 Map (option) 6.14 WatchDog 6.15 Performance Manager 6.16 Profiles 6.17

The OMC 3 menu, by which the OMC 3 is started, is only available with OMC 3 installed. For details see OMC 3 manual. Please observe that access to the OMC 3 tool can be configured in the Account Manager rights (chapter 5.4.2).

6.2.3 Tree

Note: Access to the actions ‘New’, ‘Rename’, ‘Move’, and ‘Delete’ can be configured in the Account Manager (chapter 6.4.2). Network Element Operations: For details refer to chapter 6.7. New: Depending on the desired action refer to chapter 6.6 Add New Folder, 5.7 Integration of OMC 3.54, or 6.5 Add New Network Element (NE) for a more detailed description.

Add a Note: A window is opened where a note for the NE selected in the NE Tree can be entered. This note will be displayed when tab Notes is selected in the Functions Bar (see also chapter 6.8.4 Notes).

Page 96: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 96 M0125ANA.DOC

Rename: Select to enter or change the Component Name of the NE selected in the NE Tree. The current Component Name will be highlighted and can be directly typed in.

Move to Root (OMC): Moves the selected NE to the top level folder (OMC).

Move to new Folder: Moves the selected NE to a new folder.

Move: Use to move folders or NEs to another folder, which can also be achieved by drag and drop. Only permissible transactions will be allowed, otherwise the function is not available or will not respond. Delete: The NE selected in the NE Tree will be deleted after confirming the following warning message as instructed (by typing YES and clicking OK).

Alarming History: Opens the Alarm History window for the selected NE.

Alarming Enabled: If this option is not tagged, alarms sent by the selected NE will not be visualized by A.I.M.O.S. (i.e. the check-mark should only be removed under special circumstances, e. g. for tests, maintenance of the NE, etc.). To show that alarming has been disabled a “Stop” sign will be displayed beside the respective NE in the NE Tree (see section 6.3).

Logging Enabled: If this option is tagged, a window logging the current jobs for the selected NE is displayed. When this NE log window is closed, the check-mark is removed as well.

Expand / Collapse: Saves the same purpose as clicking + or - in the NE Tree.

Refresh: Although A.I.M.O.S. updates the screen contents automatically, you can use Refresh/F5 as reinsurance that the screen shows the current status.

Actions relating to Map: The actions ‘Locate in Map’, ‘Assign Map to Folder’, ‘Show Map’, and ‘Delete Map from Folder’ are only available when tool Map is licensed (see chapter 6.14) and the according right was granted in the Account Manager (see chapter 5.4.2). Depending on the selected unit, different commands are possible. For details please also see chapter 6.14.

Page 97: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 97

6.2.4 View

Locate NE: Serves the same purpose as the button Locate (under tab Supervision; see chapter 6.8.1), which shows the alarming NE in NE Tree.

Show JobStatus: Shows the current status of the job in process.

Standard View: = normal view.

NSO View: Special view for NSOG or NSOU.

Alarm Text in Extra Line: If tagged, alarms are displayed in two lines (as shown in chapter 6.8.1); otherwise all information is displayed in one line:

Alarm History: Opens the Alarm History window for the selected NE.

Specific Problem Values for Nokia: Replaces the numbers by special ones for N.

HID's from Sub-Network Elements: Shows the HIDs of subordinate NEs, as well.

Max. Log Rows to Load: Limits the protocol.

Show All: Select this option to display all available information including the A.I.M.O.S.-internal data, which are not shown otherwise.

Load Grid Layout: For grid layouts see chapter

Save Grid Layout:

Delete Grid Layout: 6.4.1.3 Managing Table Filters and Sort Options.

Filter Builder: See chapter 6.4.2 Using the Filter Builder.

Note: For more details on grid layouts and filters in general see chapter 6.4 Visualization Filters and Sort Options.

Page 98: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 98 M0125ANA.DOC

6.2.5 Extras

Locate NE: The selected NE is highlighted in the NE Tree.

The actions below are also available via the button Recognize of the Supervision tab (see chapter 6.8.1).

Select All: Use to select all alarms of the NE currently selected in the NE tree.

Recognize All: All selected alarms are recognized. *

Recognize: Use to recognize alarms individually. *

Manual Clear: Moves selected alarm(s) from the alarm list into the Alarm History. *

Manual Delete: Permanently deletes selected alarm(s) from the alarm list and also from the Alarm History. *

* Access to the actions ‘Recognize’, ‘Recognize all’, ’Manual Clear’, and ‘Manual Delete’ can be configured in the Account Manager (chapter 5.4.2).

Change Description: Use to change the description of an NE backup.

Auditory Alarm Notifications: for more information see chapter 0.

When available (e. g. in the tab ‘Notes’), use Insert, Edit, and Delete to insert, edit, or delete the selected element (e. g. a note).

Change my Password…: Use to change your password. For more information on password setting see chapter 5.4 Account Manager - User Management.

Connector Logs: Opens the Connector Logs Window. Get Directory retrieves the list of log files available on the Connector page from the Connector to refresh the list displayed.

Click Get File to store the selected log data as zip file:

Connector logs should be sent to the Technical Support to speed up trouble analysis (see also chapter 10.2 Technical Support).

Page 99: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 99

6.2.6 Window

All applications of A.I.M.O.S. are listed. With one mouse-click the tools can be brought to the front.

Tool Windows: A list of all Visualization tools that are active in the background is displayed (in the example above only the tool Network Element List is active). Click on a tool in the list to access the respective tool window. Close all Tool Windows: All tool windows from the list shown above will be closed.

6.2.7 Menu ?

Help: Opens the Welcome page of the online help

Alarm Help: Opens the Alarm Help for the selected alarm.

Suggest a Feature: Users can use this item to suggest new features for A.I.M.O.S. by sending an according mail.

Info: Opens the Version Info window:

When the button is clicked, first, the database version is displayed and, upon a second click on the button, the update history of the database, as well as the installed data base patches.

A third click provides further information on the corresponding A.I.M.O.S. version.

Page 100: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 100 M0125ANA.DOC

6.3 NE TREE

The NE Tree is the control interface for the navigation through the complete network managed by the program.

All properties of the selected component are logically sorted by the Functions and displayed in the Management Interface.

After the installation, A.I.M.O.S. only contains the OMC database symbol in the NE Tree. The OMC (database) is the highest level of the hierarchical structure of the management and maintenance system.

In this level the overall functionality of A.I.M.O.S. is combined. Select the OMC in the NE Tree. The Functions bar will show the tabs, the MANAGEMENT INTERFACE will display the fields available at this level of the managed system.

Page 101: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 101

Note: From SW version V2.9.1 onwards the acronym SRMU (Subrack Master Unit), i.e. the optical transceiver in an ION-M system, will be replaced by the current designation MU OTRx (Master Unit Optical Transceiver) in the NE Tree.

Please observe that in other parts of A.I.M.O.S. the former designation SRMU may still be used.

To create new network elements, new folders or to add OMC3, use the context menu items 'New...' (right-mouse click) or menu Tree - New....

The levels and components can be (respective chapter of manual in brackets):

New Folder (6.6) Integration of OMC 3.54 (5.7) Any New Network Element... (NE) (6.5) To manage the network elements use the context menu item 'Network Element Operations' (right-mouse click) or menu Tree - Network. For more details see chapter 6.7 Network Element Operations

Page 102: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 102 M0125ANA.DOC

Under certain conditions the ‘Symbol’ column in the NE Tree provides additional information on the status of the respective NE. The meaning of the symbol can be verified in the ‘NE Status’ column:

The following symbols are available:

Description:

Off Duty * NE is powered on but 'out of operation area', which means that no alarms are generated.

Shut Down * NE is 'out of service'.

Alarming Disabled

If the option ‘Alarming Enabled’ in the Tree menu (see section 6.2.3) is not tagged, alarms sent by the selected NE will not be visualized by A.I.M.O.S. (observe that this status is only sensible under special circumstances, e. g. for tests, maintenance of the NE, etc.).

Planned The NE has been created already but the full information set from the NE has not been received by the A.I.M.O.S. database yet.

* These suspended periods are currently only supported for the Node AM (see also Heartbeat description of Configuration tab, section 6.8.2).

Page 103: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 103

6.4 VISUALIZATION FILTERS AND SORT OPTIONS

Note: If the Scheduler option is licensed, please observe that filters can also be customized via this tool. For details refer to chapter 6.10 Tool Scheduler (Option). The tool Network Element List (see chapter 6.11) also offers a button to use a filtered Network Element List as filter for the NE Tree.

6.4.1 Table Filters

Each table can be filtered by filter options depending on the type of table (e. g. alarm list) and the data available. The examples in the following descriptions are taken from the alarm list (as the most commonly used table); please observe that since the table filters are context-sensitive available options may differ in other tables.

Note: All filters and sort options are applied on a "per-user" basis.

6.4.1.1 Column Selection and Customizing

Click the icon in the table header to view or select which columns should be displayed (see figure to the right). Set or delete the check-mark for each column to make the selection.

A default selection depending on the type of NE is already factory-set.

(To be able to determine the position of a column drag it at the column header to the desired position and drop it there or use the Field Chooser of the advanced sort options explained in chapter 6.4.1.2.)

Please observe that for Network Elements with GPS function ‘Raise-Latitude’ and ‘Raise-Longitude‘ must be selected to show the GPS position of an NE at the time of an alarm since these columns are not part of the default selection. To also show the position of the NE when the alarm was cleared, select ‘Clear-Latitude’ and ‘Clear-Longitude‘, as well.

.

.

Each table can be filtered additionally using the drop-down button provided in some columns:

With the drop-down button the filter can be deactivated (All) and a simple filtering can easily be adjusted (Custom...).

Two filter criteria can be set and logically combined (Logic AND and logic OR).

Page 104: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 104 M0125ANA.DOC

6.4.1.2 Sort Options and Calculations

Each table can be sorted.

o Click the column headers to sort data by this column ascending or descending or

o right-mouse click the column header to get the advanced sort options illustrated to the right. With those:

the criteria for the sorted display of data can be adjusted

an easy calculation can be performed 1) the fields to be displayed can be selected with the

Field Chooser by dragging the columns from the field chooser to the data table 2)

the rows can be adjusted to fit the displayed data best 1) When the Footer is selected in the context menu, initially, only an empty bar is displayed at the bottom of the window. By a right-mouse click on it the highlighted footer field can be configured to perform easy calculations using the data of the column above. So, each column can be configured separately. The available calculations depend on the respective column.

2) When the Field Chooser is selected, the Customization window, where the columns are displayed in alphabetical order, is displayed to add or remove additional columns to / from the table by drag & drop. Unlike customizing the columns as explained in chapter 6.4.1.1 the exact position of a column can be determined with the ‘Field Chooser’.

Note: The settings for the sort options and calculations can be saved via the menu View (see chapter 6.2.4).

6.4.1.3 Managing Table Filters and Sort Options

Use the menu View to save, load and delete customized filter and sort settings for tables in a grid layout.

Load Grid Layout: Use to load a (formerly saved) column arrangement.

Select Reset to Default to set the grid layout back to factory settings.

Save Grid Layout: Use to save the current column arrangement.

Delete Grid Layout: Use to delete a (formerly saved) column arrangement.

Page 105: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 105

6.4.2 Using the Filter Builder

With the Filter builder of the menu View a more detailed filter can be created, deleted, imported and exported.

(Note: This feature is different from the NE Filter Builder explained in chapter 6.4.3).

A filter can consist of several groups of conditions. Conditions are the defined criteria for the selection.

6.4.3 Network Element Filter

The NE filter is situated on the top of the NE Tree. Five pre-set filters are available. Additionally, the NE Filter Builder can be used to create a customized view ( Custom Filter). Please note that a filter does not affect the visualization of the alarms (i.e. all alarms will be displayed and not only those of NEs included by the selected filter).

Click to get a predefined view of the network elements.

Click to open the NE Filter Builder and create a customized filter (see following chapter 6.4.3.1). This customized filter will be added to the end of the list box.

Please note that only one list entry Custom Filter is available in the list box. In case of changes of the Custom Filter its former settings will be overwritten. Move the mouse pointer over the list entry Custom Filter to get a description of it.

Page 106: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 106 M0125ANA.DOC

6.4.3.1 Customizing a Filter with the NE Filter Builder

Note: Once entries have been made in the individual fields (for details see chapter 6.4.3.2 Filter Settings), the buttons OK and Cancel will also be available and the buttons Apply and Undo will become active.

Click Arrow to list all available filters. Scroll through the list to select a filter.

Click to get the amount of NEs matching your filter settings.

The button Convert into Static Filter is explained in chapter 6.4.3.4.

Use the buttons Add or Delete to add or to delete a filter.

Use the button Apply to save you settings and visualize your filter definition in the NE Tree. Please observe that afterwards neither Undo nor Cancel will be available. This filter definition becomes the Custom Filter definition. The OK button has the same effect but, additionally, it will close the window.

To undo your settings and recover the settings that were last stored use the Undo button BEFORE clicking Apply or OK. The Cancel button serves the same purpose but, additionally, it will close the window.

Page 107: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 107

6.4.3.2 Filter Settings

Note: If no choice is made in one or more of these fields, no filter is set for the respective characteristic.

... except those...: Select except those to show in the NE Tree all network elements which do not match the filter builder definition. ...located beneath: Reflects the NE Tree. Select the folder. ...of Type: Select the type of NE. ...and Sub Type: If there are sub types available, the list box is active. A selection of several sub types is possible. ...running SW VerNo: If type is selected, choose VerNo from list or make an individual entry. ...owned by: Select the owner. ...in Configuration Group: Select the NE Configuration Group. A Configuration Group profile can be created via the Connectivity Manager (see chapter 5.3.3) or via menu Tools Profiles (see chapter 6.17.3). ...connected via: Select the connection type. ...with NE Status: Select from the list provided (see NE Filter Builder window on previous page) to filter network elements of the according NE status. ...having active Alarms: Select Any, Yes or No to filter NEs having active alarms or not. ...having disabled Alarms: Select Any, Yes or No to filter NEs having disabled alarms or not. ...having received event: Make a selection (one or more is possible) to filter NEs having received the selected event(s). For details about these events see chapter 6.10.3.1 Event Triggered Actions.

6.4.3.3 Importing a Filter from the Scheduler

To import a filter created with the tool Scheduler (as described in chapter 6.10 Tool Scheduler (Option), section 6.10.1.2 Step 2: Tab Network Elements - Customize the Network Elements), proceed as follows:

After a right-mouse click on “Custom Filter” select “Assign from Schedule” and a list of available schedule filters is displayed. Choose the desired filter but please observe that if a Custom Filter has already been stored, its settings will be overwritten and cannot be retrieved afterwards.

Page 108: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 108 M0125ANA.DOC

6.4.3.4 Filter Type Conversion

As default, filters are created as dynamic filters, i.e. the chosen filter will always evaluate the current state according to the given criteria and adapt the selection / NE Tree accordingly.

It is, however, possible to convert a dynamic filter into a static filter, which will always show the selection that was made when it was last stored. To do so, use the Convert into Static Filter button in the NE Filter Builder window (or in the Schedule Wizard).

Alternatively, it is also possible to do a right-mouse click in the NE Filter Builder window (or in the Schedule Wizard) and select “Convert into Static Filter”.

In both cases a different Filter Builder/Schedule Wizard will be displayed, where an individual selection of NEs can be made by setting or removing the tags as desired.

Confirm your selection and the filter will be changed accordingly. When it is selected again, it will always show the tagged NEs only.

Note: Please observe that this change is irreversible, i.e. turning this filter back into a dynamic one is not possible. A right-mouse click in the “static” Filter Builder/Schedule Wizard will prompt the selection “Create Dynamic Filter from Scratch” to access the “dynamic” Filter Builder/Schedule Wizard, where all filter settings have to be entered anew.

Page 109: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 109

6.5 ADD NEW NETWORK ELEMENT (NE)

To add a new NE

- right-mouse click the database level or folder in the NE Tree, select menu New / Any New Network Element

or

- select in A.I.M.O.S. Visualization Tree / New / Any New Network Element. Select the type of NE to be created from the list (in the right part of the screen an illustration of the highlighted NE will be displayed) and confirm with Next:

Node M, Node G, Node C, Node AM(+)*, Node A AMR OneBase MCPA CellExtender Legacy ION-B Optical System ION-U System / ION-E System ION Optical System MRx18 DICE MIR-T ION-M MiniMaster generic generic 1 generic 2 MR2003P MR2133

* For Network Elements of the Node AM(+) type, choose type Node A from the list.

Depending on the type of NE, the corresponding protocol is selected automatically.

6.5.1 Node X

6.5.1.1 Basic Parameter Setting

The Node X – i.e. Node C, Node G, Node M, or Node A ( choose this type also for a Node A+ or a Node AM) – is the highest management and supervision level of a Node X system. When a Node X system is initialized to A.I.M.O.S., its complete structure is queried and transmitted to the A.I.M.O.S. database.

When the corresponding Node X entry from the list has been selected and confirmed (click Next), the ‘New Node X…' wizard starts (the ‘Use SNMPv3’ parameter is available for Node A only):

Page 110: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 110 M0125ANA.DOC

IP-Address / Port: Enter the IP address and IP port of the new NodeX system.

Network Connection Type: Select the network connection type from the list to be used for connections to this Node X (only available types are suggested).

Modem Group: Select from the list box. The modem groups are predefined in the tool 'Connectivity Manager' with the function 'Modem Group'.

Uplink Connection Parameters: Select Overwrite or No Change.

Choose Overwrite if A.I.M.O.S. shall set or overwrite the uplink connectivity parameters (Connection from Node X to A.I.M.O.S.) in the Node X system.

Note: If the 'Uplink Connection Parameters' are set to 'Overwrite', alarms from the Node X system are sent to A.I.M.O.S. automatically. If the alarm forwarding from the Node X system should not be changed, select 'No change'.

SNMPv3: This parameter is available for NEs of the Node A type, only. Set according to NE configuration.

After entering these Basic Parameters of the new Node X click Next.

The parameters required in the following screens depend on the Network Connection Type selected. In the screens displayed the type Circuit Switched is chosen.

6.5.1.2 Dial Parameter Setting

A: Overwrite was chosen as Uplink Connection Parameter:

Enter telephone number and PPP login data (RAS-modem connection) or the A.I.M.O.S. IP address (LAN connection) of the A.I.M.O.S. server and click Next.

Enter A.I.M.O.S. IP address and phone no. of A.I.M.O.S. and the PPP user name and password. Click Save to make the entry to the database.

Page 111: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 111

B: No Change was chosen as Uplink Connection Parameter:

Enter telephone number and PPP login data (RAS-modem connection) or the A.I.M.O.S. IP address (LAN connection) of the A.I.M.O.S. server.

Click Save to make the entry to the database.

Then, continue as follows irrespective of the Uplink Connection Parameter selected (the exemplary screens are made with the parameter Overwrite):

It is recommended to click Try Connection to setup a test connection:

The progress will be shown in the status/details window.

If the test connection is successfully finished (as shown in the illustration above), click Next to proceed. (If the test connection fails, check the hardware, e g. cable, network adapter, etc., the software / RAS connection, and the IP parameters for the connection.)

Enter Component Name and Trap Info and select an NE Owner from the list provided.

(These data can be displayed in the NE Tree via the context menu Field Chooser.)

Click Get to import the unique identifier of the Node system.

Page 112: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 112 M0125ANA.DOC

When this job is finished, click Next.

Now the current status and settings of the Node X system can be queried:

Check the respective box to query the information and click Get.

If active alarms are queried and an alarm is active at the Node X system, an alarm message will pop up.

Click Show to see details of the alarm(s).

Click Close to shut the alarm information window.

Click Close to shut the installation of the NE connection.

Assign the Node X to a folder by selecting the Node X. Click in the context menu Move and choose the desired folder.

Page 113: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 113

6.5.2 AMR

Select the New AMR entry from the list and click Next.

The 'New AMR…' wizard starts:

Enter the Basic Parameters of the new AMR:

IP-Address / Port: Enter the IP address and IP port of the new AMR system.

Network Connection Type: Select the network connection type from the list to be used for connections to this AMR (only available types are suggested).

Modem Group: Select from the list box. The modem groups are predefined in the tool 'Connectivity Manager' with the function 'Modem Group'.

Uplink Connection Parameters: Select Overwrite or No Change. Choose Overwrite if A.I.M.O.S. shall set or overwrite the uplink connectivity parameters (connection from AMR to A.I.M.O.S.) in the AMR system. Note: If the 'Uplink Connection Parameters' are set to 'Overwrite', alarms from the AMR system are sent to A.I.M.O.S. automatically. If the alarm forwarding from the AMR system should not be changed, select 'No change'. Refer to chapter 6.5.1.2 Dial Parameter Setting for the step by step instruction. Assign the AMR to a folder by selecting the AMR. Click in the context menu Move and choose the desired folder.

Page 114: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 114 M0125ANA.DOC

6.5.3 MCPA

Select the OneBase MCPA CellExtender entry from the list and click Next.

The 'New OneBase MCPA …' wizard starts:

Enter the Basic Parameters of the New OneBase MCPA CellExtender:

IP-Address / Port: Enter the IP address and IP port of the new OneBase MCPA CellExtender system.

Network Connection Type: Select the network connection type to be used for connections to this MCPA (only available types are suggested). Standard is LAN. If the communication group for a connection via modem (RAS outgoing) is selected, click Next and enter the telephone number and PPP login data for the MCPA system.

Uplink Connection Parameters: Select Overwrite or No Change. Choose Overwrite if A.I.M.O.S. shall set or overwrite the uplink connectivity parameters (connection from MCPA to A.I.M.O.S.) in the MCPA system. Note: If the 'Uplink Connection Parameters' are set to 'Overwrite', alarms from the MCPA system are sent to A.I.M.O.S. automatically. If the alarm forwarding from the MCPA system should not be changed, select 'No change'. Refer to chapter 6.5.1.2 Dial Parameter Setting for the step by step instruction. Assign the MCPA to a folder by selecting the MCPA. Click in the context menu Move and choose the desired folder.

Page 115: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 115

6.5.4 ION-B Controller Type TSUN1, TSUN2, TSUN3 and TSUN6

Select the Legacy ION-B Optical System entry from the list and click Next.

Note: Observe that ION-B systems with a TSUN4 controller must be created as an ION-M Optical System element as explained in chapter 6.5.6.

The Legacy ION-B Optical System level is the highest management and supervision level of an ION-B system. When it is initialized to A.I.M.O.S., its complete structure is queried and transmitted to the A.I.M.O.S. database.

The 'New Legacy ION-B …' wizard starts.

Enter the Basic Parameters of the new Legacy ION-B Optical System:

IP-Address / Port: Enter the IP address and IP port of the new ION-B system.

Network Connection Type: Select the network connection type to be used for connections to this ION-B (only available types are suggested). If the communication group for a connection via modem (RAS outgoing) is selected, click Next and enter the telephone number and PPP login data for the ION-B system.

Modem Group: Select from the list box. The modem groups are predefined in the tool 'Connectivity Manager' with the function 'Modem Group'. Click Save to make the entry in the database and Next to proceed.

It is recommended to click 'Try connection' to setup a test connection. If the test connection fails, check the hardware (cable, network adapter,...), the software (RAS connection) and the IP parameters for the connection.

Click 'Next>>>'.

Click Get to import the unique identifier of the ION-B system.

Click Get to import the complete structure of the ION-B system. This will request the current topology of the ION-B system with all components. The answer to this request is evaluated and entries are made to the database for all system components.

Page 116: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 116 M0125ANA.DOC

Click 'Next>>>'.

Now the current status and settings of the ION-B system can be queried. Check the respective box to query the information and click Get.

If active alarms are queried and an alarm is active at the ION-B system, an alarm message will pop up.

Click 'Show' to see details of the alarm(s).

Assign the ION-B to a folder by selecting the ION-B. Click in the context menu Move and choose the desired folder. When the connection has to be established through LAN interface it is required to configure the following parameters via the ION-B WEB interface:

1) 'Network Host IP' 2) 'Network Subnet Mask' 3) 'Network Gateway' 4) 'OMC IP Address' (A.I.M.O.S.) 5) Check that 'Alarm Notification' is 'Enabled' 6) Ensure the 'LAN' connectivity option in the 'Connectivity Table' is 'Enabled' 7) Number of 'Retry' of 'LAN' connectivity option in the 'Connectivity Table' When the connection has to be established through a modem connection (dial-out, dial-in) interface it is required to configure the following parameters:

1) 'Modem Driver' (not required in ION-B Supervision Unit SW v 4.1.1 and previous SW version)

2) 'Modem AT Baud' 3) 'Initialization String' 4) 'PIN Number' when enabled (depending on the modem SIM card) 5) Enable the 'Startup PPP Service On Boot' 6) Dial-in account: 'User Name' and 'Password' 7) Check that 'Alarm Notification' is 'Enabled' 8) 'OMC IP Address' (A.I.M.O.S.) 9) Enable the 'CS' (Circuit Switched Network) connectivity option in the 'Connectivity

Table' 10) 'Phone No' of the enabled CS connectivity option (ppp login) 11) 'User Name' and 'Password' of the enabled CS connectivity option (ppp login) 12) Number of 'Retry' of 'CS' connectivity option in the 'Connectivity Table' 13) Disable connectivity options different from CS For a detailed description on how to configure the ION-B Supervision Unit see 'ION-B Remote Supervision System User Manual'.

Note: In order to contact an ION-B through A.I.M.O.S. web interface, the Internet Explorer settings [Tools-Internet Options-Security] have to be set to ‘Allow Meta Refresh enabled’.

Page 117: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 117

6.5.5 ION-U System / ION-E System

Note: Please observe that currently for these systems only alarming is available. Thus, no configuration is possible yet.

Select the ION-U System / ION-E System entry from the list and click Next.

The 'New ION-U System' / 'New ION-E System' wizard starts (as the wizard setup is the same for both systems only the screen for ION-U is shown here):

Enter the Basic Parameters of the new ION System:

IP-Address / Port: Enter the IP address and IP port of the new ION system.

Network Connection Type: Select the network connection type to be used for connections to this ION-U / ION-E (only available types are suggested). If the communication group for a connection via modem (RAS outgoing) is selected, click Next and enter the telephone number and PPP login data for the ION-U / ION-E system.

Modem Group: Select from the list box. The modem groups are predefined in the tool 'Connectivity Manager' with the function 'Modem Group'.

Uplink Connection Parameters: Select Overwrite or No Change. Choose Overwrite if A.I.M.O.S. shall set or overwrite the uplink connectivity parameters (connection from ION system to A.I.M.O.S.) in the ION system.

Note: If the 'Uplink Connection Parameters' are set to 'Overwrite', alarms from the ION system are sent to A.I.M.O.S. automatically. If the alarm forwarding from the ION system should not be changed, select 'No change'. Refer to chapter 6.5.1.2 Dial Parameter Setting for the step by step instruction.

Assign the ION-U / ION-E system to a folder by selecting the corresponding ION-U / ION-E entry. Click in the context menu Move and choose the desired folder.

Page 118: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 118 M0125ANA.DOC

6.5.6 ION-M Optical System Controller Type RMC, MMC Plus, TSUN4

An ION-M Optical System is the highest management and supervision level of an ION-M system. When it is initialized to A.I.M.O.S., its complete structure is queried and transmitted to the A.I.M.O.S. database.

Select the New ION-M entry from the list and click Next.

The 'New ION-M Optical System' wizard starts:

Enter the Basic Parameters of the new ION-M Optical System:

IP-Address / Port: Enter the IP address and IP port of the new ION-M system.

Login User: Enter the username to be used for the login to the ION-M system.

Login Password: Enter the password for the login to the ION-M system.

Network Connection Type: Select the network connection type to be used for connections to this ION-M (only available types are suggested). If the communication group for a connection via modem (RAS outgoing) is selected, click Next and enter the telephone number and PPP login data for the ION-M system.

Modem Group: Select from the list box. The modem groups are predefined in the tool 'Connectivity Manager' with the function 'Modem Group'.

Uplink Connection Parameters: Select Overwrite or No Change. Choose Overwrite if A.I.M.O.S. shall set or overwrite the uplink connectivity parameters (connection from ION-M system to A.I.M.O.S.) in the ION-M system.

Note: If the 'Uplink Connection Parameters' are set to 'Overwrite', alarms from the ION-M system are sent to A.I.M.O.S. automatically. If the alarm forwarding from the ION-M system should not be changed, select 'No change'. Refer to chapter 6.5.1.2 Dial Parameter Setting for the step by step instruction.

Assign the ION-M system to a folder by selecting the ION-M entry. Click in the context menu Move and choose the desired folder.

Page 119: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 119

6.5.7 SMS Network Element

The SMS-connected Network Element level is the supervision level of repeater systems with an SMS interface.

Select the New SMS-connected NE from the list. This can be:

MRx18 Generic DICE Generic1 MIR-T Generic2 ION-M MiniMaster MR2003P MR2133 The wizard for the new NE starts:

Note: The required entries vary depending on the type of SMS-connected NE.

Page 120: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 120 M0125ANA.DOC

Modem Group: Select from the list box. The modem groups are predefined in the tool 'Connectivity Manager' with the function 'Modem Group'.

Telephone number: Enter the telephone number of the new SMS-connected NE and add information on the location of the device for identification purpose.

Location: Enter the location.

Port Configuration: Alarms can be assigned to ports according to the settings at the NE or the ports can be disabled. For several SMS-connected Network Elements ports are preset. For details on the inputs please see the documentation of the device.

Click button 'Set' to send the device a configuration SMS for the initialization of the device to A.I.M.O.S.

Click Next.

Now the current status and settings of the SMS-connected system can be queried. Check the respective box to query the information and click Get.

If active alarms are queried and an alarm is active at the NE, an alarm message will pop up.

6.5.7.1 MRx18

Select the 'MRx18' entry if the device is a member of the MRx18 family (miniRepeater family) and capable of the SMS feature.

It is mandatory to enter the telephone number of the modem.

6.5.7.2 DICE

Select the 'DICE' entry if the device is a member of the DICE family (miniRepeater) and capable of the SMS feature.

The default port configuration is as follows:

The ports are preset for typical miniRepeater applications.

Page 121: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 121

6.5.7.3 MIR-T

Select the 'MIR-T' entry if the device is a member of the MIR-T family and capable of the SMS feature.

The default port configuration is as follows:

The ports are preset for typical MIR-T applications.

6.5.7.4 ION-M MiniMaster

Select the 'ION-M MiniMaster' entry if the device is an ION-M MiniMaster and capable of the SMS feature.

6.5.7.5 Generic

Select the 'Generic' entry if the device is no member of the other repeater families and capable of the SMS feature.

The default port configuration is as follows:

Ports 1 to 4 are preset to external alarms, port 5 to 'Heartbeat'.

Page 122: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 122 M0125ANA.DOC

6.5.7.6 Generic 1

Select the 'Generic1' entry if the device is no member of the other repeater families and capable of the SMS feature.

The default port configuration is as follows:

Ports 1 to 5 are preset to external alarms.

6.5.7.7 Generic 2

Select the 'Generic2' entry if the device is no member of the other repeater families and capable of the SMS feature.

The default port configuration is as follows:

6.5.7.8 MR2003P

Select the 'MR2003P' entry if the device is an MR2003P and capable of the SMS feature.

The default port configuration is as follows:

6.5.7.9 MR2133

Select the 'MR2133' entry if the device is an MR2133 and capable of the SMS feature.

The default port configuration is as follows:

Page 123: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 123

6.6 ADD NEW FOLDER

Folders serve to organize the network components in a clearly arranged way and to control access to network components for the users. Access to NEs in a folder can be assigned to users. For best visualization of the network feel free to create as many folders as necessary. Select the destination level (OMC or folder) in the NE Tree with a right-mouse click, choose the New / New Folder and enter a name for the folder. Or select in A.I.M.O.S. Visualization Tree / New / New Folder. The network elements can easily be assigned to a folder by dragging the NEs to the folder with drag-and-drop.

6.7 NETWORK ELEMENT OPERATIONS

To manage the network elements use the context menu item 'Network Element Operations', which is accessible by a right-mouse click or via the menu: Tree Network. Depending on the NE type selected, all NE operations available for this specific type are displayed:

The example above shows the NE Operations menu of a Node AM but the following survey lists all operations that are available. When an operation is chosen, it will be carried out for the selected NE.

Please observe that access to some of the operations may also depend on the Account Manager rights (for details see chapter 5.4.2).

Finish Installation: This operation is only available if an NE has not yet been set up completely. In such a case use it to finish the setup.

Try connection: Use to test the connection to the NE. Performing this operation is recommended after the installation is finished.

Read Unique System ID...: Use to get the system-specific ID.

Read Network Structure…: Available in systems with NE subunits to read the complete network topology into A.I.M.O.S., e. g. after changes in the system topology. 1)

Query Alarms: Use to read all current alarms of the NE into A.I.M.O.S. 2)

Query All…: This operation opens a submenu with further actions that can be performed. All are listed but only those available for the selected NE are active (tagged).

Page 124: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 124 M0125ANA.DOC

Upon clicking the button Get all tagged operations are carried out and the progress will be displayed in the right part of the screen.

The following operations correspond to a main NE operation: Network Structure = 1); Active Alarms = 2); Hardware Inventory Data = 3)

The Parameter Settings and Current State Values depend on the selected NE type. For details see the following table:

Get Parameter Settings Get Current State Values

Get Version Info Get Heartbeat Config Get Config Get Config Query Connectivity User Texts

Node G / Node M / Node C / Node A

Alarm Severities (not for Node C)

ION-M Query All Params Query Actual State

Get RepeaterType Get RSSI Get Segment Get RF Status Get ALSEV Get CI Get H-Beat Get SW-Version

MRx18

Get SMSC

Read HID’s: Use to read HID information into A.I.M.O.S.; this operation should be done after changes of the HW. 3)

Set Time…: Use to set the time and date for the NE. The submenu also offers a Get command to see the current settings.

Reboot: Use to reboot the NE.

Get GPS Position: Use to determine the coordinates of the NE (Node AM only), which will be displayed in the ‘Configuration’ window (see chapter 6.8.2).

Send Configuration: Use to initialize SMS connection for NE.

Set Factory Default: Use to set NE back to factory-set default values.

Get Service Center Number: Use to retrieve the Service Center Number of an SMS-connected NE.

Page 125: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 125

Send Service Center Number: Use to send the Service Center Number of an SMS-connected NE.

Delete Pending Configuration Data: This operation overwrites ‘planned settings’ with ‘current settings’ to get rid of [legacy]* ‘planned settings’. * or [outdated]

If you are sure to continue, confirm the following notification:

Backup: Use to store the configuration data of the NE into the database. The following operations will be performed (automation via Tool Scheduler (Option) is possible; see chapter 6.10.3):

Started Get Version Info Get Heartbeat Config Query Connectivity User Texts

Alarm Severities Get HW/RF Wrapping and saving backup file Compressing backup data Saved backup to database

6.8 FUNCTIONS BAR

The Functions bar contains the tabs with the features and functions available for the Network Element selected with the NE Tree.

The tabs are sorted in a hierarchical way: The upper tabs are determined by the NE selected in the NE Tree. The example shows the upper tab 'Configuration', which holds the lower tab 'User'. Depending on the size of the window not all tabs available might be displayed right away; use the arrow buttons to scroll to the left or right.

Note: Depending on the type of NE and its supported features, the tabs vary.

The upper tabs can be: Supervision Notes Configuration Log Maintenance

Page 126: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 126 M0125ANA.DOC

6.8.1 Supervision

Tab Supervision lists all alarms for the selected NE. Depending on the selection in the NE Tree, all alarms of the NE, the complete system, or the complete network are displayed. Alarms can be recognized, manually cleared or deleted via the button Recognize (see also chapter 6.2.5 Extras). Access to the actions ‘Manual Clear’, ‘Manual Delete’, ‘Recognize’, and ‘Recognize all’ can be configured in the Account Manager (chapter 5.4.2).

Alarm Help opens the Alarm Help for the selected alarm.

The button Locate shows the alarming NE in the NE Tree.

The button Excel Export allows saving the alarm list (of the selected NE, folder, or the complete network) in an Excel compatible file format. Access can be configured in the Account Manager (chapter 6.4.2).

Customize the design of the alarm list in Configuration / Alarm Settings.

The displayed columns depend on the selection made in the table filter as explained in chapter 6.4.1.1.

Please observe for Network Elements with GPS function that the columns ‘Latitude’ and ‘Longitude‘ (scroll to end of list as explained in chapter 6.4.1.1) must be selected to show the GPS position of an NE at the time of an alarm since these columns are not part of the default selection. In case of an alarm of an NE with GPS coordinates the context menu ‘GPS Position’ is available by a right-mouse click on the alarm. The coordinates can be copied to the Windows clipboard or to “Google Maps” to display the NE in a map:

Coordinates of the last known NE position.

Coordinates of the position, where the alarm was raised.

Page 127: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 127

6.8.1.1 Alarm History

Click Alarm History to show the last 5.000 alarms. The number of listed alarms can be edited with Alarm History Initial Size Limit in Account / Button Organizations.

Access to the actions ‘Select All’ and ‘Manual Delete’ can be configured in the Account Manager (chapter 5.4.2).

Click Select All to mark all displayed alarms.

Tag Complete List to show all alarms available in the alarm history. Note that this may cause a performance decrease due to the number of alarms.

6.8.1.2 Alarm Help

Select an alarm and click Recognize - Show Alarm Help or press button F1 to view further information on the alarm.

The context-sensitive Troubleshooting help appears.

Remarks can be added and saved with the alarm message.

Page 128: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 128 M0125ANA.DOC

6.8.2 Configuration

Please observe that access to this tab can be configured in the Account Manager (see chapter 5.4.2).

In some lower tabs the button is provided to import the current repeater data. Note: Only the supported features of the selected NE can be customized within the respective tab.

Changes in the A.I.M.O.S. database can be made in the white fields of the left row. Depending on the tab, changes to the NE settings can either be made by clicking the

Edit NE button or using the checkbox .

Changes have to be confirmed with the OK button or with . The lower tabs can be:

1) General

Information on the NE is listed here, profiles can be assigned (see chapter 6.17), and Alarming and Alarm Polling can be en/disabled.

For NEs supporting the corresponding feature (currently only available for the Node AM), this tab also provides the GPS Position button which opens a popup menu:

If the GPS position was not submitted by the NE during the creation process, it is possible that, initially, only ‘Get GPS Position’ and ‘Show updated Get GPS Position in Google Maps’ are provided (availability can be restricted by Account Manager Rights, see section 5.4.2).

These serve to determine the coordinates of the NE, which are displayed in the Configuration window, or to directly display the NE in a map.

Page 129: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 129

With the extended popup menu these coordinates can then be copied to the Windows clipboard or to “Google Maps” to display the NE in a map.

With every alarm of the respective NE its GPS position will be updated.

2) Connectivity

All data for the connection to and from the NE are displayed here. Contents of the Connectivity page vary depending on the type of connection supported by the NE. For further information refer to chapter 6.9 Configuration - Connectivity.

3) Heartbeat

Heartbeat status and configuration are displayed and can be changed. The heartbeat is a kind of "I am alive" message of the NEs sent by the individual NE via the same communications channel as the alarms. Its purpose (when activated) is to guarantee that an NE is 'in operation' and able to send out alarms (communications channel for alarms from NE to A.I.M.O.S. is functioning) if required.

HeartBeat Status displays the ‘Next Expected’ and ‘Last Received…’ heartbeats of an NE.

HeartBeat Config displays the heartbeat configuration settings of the respective NE.

The HeartBeat Resume Config is only displayed for NEs supporting this feature (e.g. Node AM). For more details see * notice on next page.

Upon clicking the Edit NE button, the following features can be configured:

Page 130: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 130 M0125ANA.DOC

Enabled: When tagged, the NE will send a regular heartbeat that will be monitored by A.I.M.O.S.:

Interval: Set the interval at which the heartbeat will be sent.

Heartbeat Overtime: Time period the system will wait until a ‘Heartbeat missing’ alarm is generated if the heartbeat is not received within the configured ‘Interval’.

* For NEs with suspended heartbeat supervision while ‘Shut Down’ or ‘Off Duty’ (these conditions are visualized in the ‘Symbol’ and ’NE Status‘ columns of the NE Tree see section 6.3) the HeartBeat Resume Config settings are available, as well. If the according ‘Maximal Duration’ is set and no heartbeat is received within the configured period, the system will generate a ‘Heartbeat resume missing’ alarm. Note: With default setting ‘0 minutes’ this feature is not active, i.e. the system will wait until the NE is no longer ‘Shut Down’ or ‘Off Duty’, until supervision is resumed and a new heartbeat is expected.

4) User Use to display and change the NE user settings. This page is only available for NEs supporting this feature (currently only Node AM/ Node A+ and ION-M). The following screen shot shows an exemplary view of a Node A+:

For the User Manager two settings are available: A.I.M.O.S. or NE. If it is set to A.I.M.O.S., the A.I.M.O.S. password requirements as specified in section 5.1.3.1 Password Settings will be valid for setting the User Passwords below; with setting NE the requirements are determined by the SW of the corresponding NE. For details on these, check the SW manual of the NE.

Page 131: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 131

For NEs of the Node AM type, the “Password Duration in Days” for a User can be set from 1 – 999 days when the corresponding check mark is set. When no setting is made for this parameter, the password does not expire:

Page 132: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 132 M0125ANA.DOC

5) HW/RF In this section hardware settings are listed. For details on NE specific hardware settings please read the manual of the respective NE. For a Node G the following tabs are available:

Please observe that after performing 'Show Set Values' in tab 'Cell Allocation' or 'Mobile Allocation' a context-sensitive menu can be accessed by a right-mouse click. In case of a Node G with Frequency Shifting the following tabs are available:

For a Node A the following tabs are available:

With the button 'Sync NE' the current data of the NE are queried and the display is updated accordingly.

The tab ‘System Configuration’ provides the additional selection ‘Enable GPS-Based Configuration’ (under ‘Network Element Settings’) if the NE supports this feature:

6) External I/Os

This section lists the settings for configurable external alarms.

Page 133: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 133

7) Alarm Settings

On the OMC level the tab Alarm Severities is available in order to set the severities of alarms generated by A.I.M.O.S.:

In the tab Clear Modes set whether recognized alarms (either manually or using the Auto-Recognize feature) should be cleared automatically upon recognition.

The following settings are available for other NEs:

Note: To save settings, always click the button.

In order to set the severities of alarms generated by the selected NE, the tab Alarm Severities is available:

Page 134: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 134 M0125ANA.DOC

The Actual Severity and Actual Latency (time an alarm must be active before it is informed to A.I.M.O.S.) are displayed:

Tag Show Set Values to display the Planned Severity and Planned Latency columns where the severity and latency settings can be changed.

Available severity levels are: ‘critical’, ‘major’, ‘minor’, ‘warning’, ‘disabled’, and (if supported by the selected NE) ‘information’ The alarm latency can be set at pre-defined intervals in a range from 0 to 60 minutes.

Alarm Thresholds: For all NEs supporting the feature (i.e. Node type network elements), this additional tab is available (for details see SW manual of the corresponding Node).

Page 135: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 135

8) Web

Use this tab to access the web interface of the selected NE. If certain criteria are fulfilled for the corresponding NE (for details see chapter 5.3.3.5), a Login button is provided by which username and password will be entered automatically to the login page to go directly to the home page of the NE. Otherwise, login data will have to be entered manually.

If HTTPS is chosen as WEB Server Configuration in the Connectivity page (see section 6.9.5.5), a certificate installation is required before the first access and the system will prompt an according Security Alert. The detailed procedure is explained in chapter 14.

Note: A change of settings made in the web interface is saved to the NE only. The database of A.I.M.O.S. is not updated automatically. To synchronize the database of A.I.M.O.S., use either the Event Triggered Actions of the Tool Scheduler (Option) (see section 6.10.3.1) or the NE operation Query All (see chapter 6.7). If important settings for the A.I.M.O.S. connection are changed (e.g. connectivity mode, IP address, username, or password), make sure to adjust these in the Connectivity page of A.I.M.O.S. (see section 6.9 Configuration - Connectivity), as well.

For refreshing the screen display, a Refresh button is available.

9) NE Image

Use this tab to insert an image of your choice for the NE.:

Click the Load from File button and browse to the location where your image is filed:

Supported image types are:

Page 136: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 136 M0125ANA.DOC

6.8.3 Maintenance

Please observe that access to this tab can be configured in the Account Manager (see chapter 5.4.2).

Note: Only the supported features of the selected NE can be customized within the respective tab. The tabs can be:

Backup/Restore This tab serves to make a backup of all settings within the NE (automation via Tool Scheduler (Option) is possible; see chapter 6.10.3). If changes made to the NE seem to be incorrect, a previous stage of all settings can be restored in the NE. Use the Excel Export button to save a survey of available backups as Excel file. The Export to File button saves the data in zip file format (see also chapter 6.2.1). Use this function also to copy the configuration of an NE to a new repeater with the same software and hardware versions.

Revision Info This section contains a listing of hardware and software information.

Inventory Data This section is a listing of all components with the Hardware Inventory Data.

There are 3 different views available: The selection made here determines the list of NEs displayed in the Maintenance view illustrated above. The displayed data can be saved as Excel file (Excel Export button).

A) ‘Current HID’s’ shows the HW currently installed on site. The displayed period, which may still be stored from a former view (B or C), does not affect the list.

B) ‘HID’s valid between’ shows the HW installed on site in a specific time frame that can be set as desired.

C) ‘HID’s changed between’ shows all changes (e.g. added or removed) in a specific time frame that can be set as desired.

The following examples explain the information given in the individual columns of the Maintenance table.

Page 137: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 137

Example 1: A new device (identified by ID Number & Serial Number) has been added

Example 2: An existing device (identified by ID Number & Serial Number) has been removed

Example Column Entry Explanation

Reported date/time 1 & 2

Reported State ‘new/added’date/time the device has been added

Outdated no entry 1

Outdated State no entry device is not outdated

Outdated date/time date/time the device has been removed 2

Outdated State ‘removed’ device has been removed Example 3: A device (identified by ID Number & Serial Number) has been changed two times (e.g. new SW versions)

Example 4: A device (identified by ID Number & Serial Number) has been changed (e.g. new SW version) and removed afterwards

Example Column Entry Explanation Legacy data (line 1)

Reported date/time Reported State ‘new/added’

date/time the device has been added

Outdated date/time 3 & 4

Outdated State ‘obsolete’ date/time the device has become obsolete (the 1st time)

Legacy data (line 2) Reported date/time Reported State ‘changed’

date/time the device has been changed the 1st time

Outdated date/time Outdated State ‘obsolete’

date/time the device has become obsolete the 2nd time

New data (line 3) Reported date/time Reported State ‘changed’

date/time the device has been changed the 2nd time

Outdated no entry

3

Outdated State no entry device is not outdated

New data (line 2) Reported date/time Reported State ‘changed’

date/time the device has been changed

Outdated date/time 4

Outdated State ‘removed’ date/time the device has been removed

Page 138: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 138 M0125ANA.DOC

6.8.4 Notes

Notes can be attached for each separate NE (see also Add a note in chapter 6.2.3 Tree). These notes can be saved as Excel file with the Excel Export button.

6.8.5 Log

The feature Log is only displayed when Show Visu Log is tagged in the Preferences Editor (see chapter 5.2). It shows the internal debug logs that are generated by the A.I.M.O.S. Connector service for the respective NE. These logs can be saved as Excel file with the Excel Export button.

Please observe that access to this tab can also be configured in the Account Manager (see chapter 5.4.2).

6.9 CONFIGURATION - CONNECTIVITY

The Connectivity page displays all parameters that are necessary to establish the communication connections between A.I.M.O.S. and the network elements.

NEs already integrated into A.I.M.O.S. database via CS connection and capable of Packet Data communication can be switched to Packet Data via the Configuration / Connectivity settings.

Note: To make use of packet data communication it is required that A.I.M.O.S. server is connected to packet data network via LAN. It is also required that the A.I.M.O.S. server has received a fixed IP address from the packet data network.

Red marked lines/parameters in the connectivity pages are an indication that there is an inconsistency among the current connectivity settings of an NE - relating to the settings in the Connectivity Mode or - relating to the settings of the Preferences Editor (5.2).

Click Edit NE to display the values that can be changed. Circuit and the packet switched connections are configured as fallback systems. If the preferred connection type is unavailable, the NE will attempt to use the other connection type if it is supported by the modem.

Page 139: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 139

For NEs supporting VPN, additional parameters are provided (see chapter 6.9.6).

For NEs supporting SNMPv3 the corresponding parameter is available in the ‘Common Connectivitiy’ section:

The following NE-related data may be available in the Network Element section irrespective of the communication type selected. Their availability only depends on the NE type and settings (for explanations see chapter 6.9.5):

6.9.1 Circuit Switched Connection The example shows the circuit connectivity settings of a Node.

Note: Check in Tools / Connection Manager whether the needed Modem Groups and RAS-in Profiles are created. If they are not, create them.

Buttons: see chapter 6.9.5.1.

Common Connectivity Connectivity Mode: Displays the connectivity mode for connecting this NE.

A.I.M.O.S. (= A.I.M.O.S. related settings) Dial-Out Modem Group: Select modem group from list. OMC IP Address: A.I.M.O.S. IP Address. OMC IP Port: A.I.M.O.S. IP Port. Dial-In Configuration: A.I.M.O.S. RAS-in profile.

Network Element: NE related settings. Only available settings are displayed. If the network connection is set to RAS, the CS IP address and port are used by A.I.M.O.S. CS IP Address / IP Port: IP address and IP port of an NE connected via circuit switched connection. Dial-In Configuration: NE profile. CS Phone Number: NE phone number (data call). Packet Switched Settings (Fallback): Select the PS profile. WEB-Login Configuration: see chapter 6.9.5.2. Alarm Type: see chapter 6.9.5.3. Inform Timeout: see chapter 6.9.5.3. Inform Retries: see chapter 6.9.5.3. Zone Change Traps: see chapter 6.9.5.4. WEB Server Configuration: see chapter 6.9.5.5.

Additional Information: see chapter 6.9.5.6.

Page 140: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 140 M0125ANA.DOC

6.9.2 Packet Switched Always On Connection

6.9.2.1 Overview

NE permanently holds the packet switched modem connection.

The example shows connectivity settings of a Node.

Note: Check in Tools / Connection Manager whether the needed PS Profiles are created. If they are not, create them.

Buttons: see chapter 6.9.5.1.

Common Connectivity Connectivity Mode: Displays the connectivity mode for connecting this NE.

A.I.M.O.S. A.I.M.O.S. related settings. OMC IP Address: A.I.M.O.S. IP address. OMC IP Port: A.I.M.O.S. IP port.

Network Element: NE related settings. Only available settings are displayed. PS IP Address / IP Port: IP address and IP port of an NE connected via packet switched connection. Packet Switched Settings: NE packet switched profile. WEB-Login Configuration: see chapter 6.9.5.2. Alarm Type: see chapter 6.9.5.3. Inform Timeout: see chapter 6.9.5.3. Inform Retries: see chapter 6.9.5.3. Zone Change Traps: see chapter 6.9.5.4. WEB Server Configuration: see chapter 6.9.5.5.

Additional Information: see chapter 6.9.5.6.

Page 141: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 141

6.9.2.2 Change Connectivity Mode to Packet Switched Always On

To change to the connectivity mode 'Packet Switched Always On' proceed as shown in this example:

Step 1: Check in chapter 5.3 Connectivity Manager - Modem Management

whether the needed PS Profile is created. If not create the PS profile.

Step 2: Select Configuration / Connectivity tab of the NE to be modified.

Step 3: Click Edit NE to edit the settings of the NE.

Step 4: Select Connectivity Mode 'Packet Switched Always On'.

Step 5: Select the PS-profile in Packet Switched Settings.

Step 6: Customize the other settings.

Step 7. Confirm the window with OK.

Step 8: The parameters PS IP Address and PS IP Port in the current settings will be marked red. This gives notice that the NE is not yet online.

Step 9: A.I.M.O.S. will establish a CS connection to the repeater showing the progress in an information window. Wait until the dial-up is successfully finished. This can take up to two minutes. Then A.I.M.O.S. displays the PS IP Address and PS IP Port transmitted from the repeater.

Page 142: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 142 M0125ANA.DOC

6.9.3 Packet Switched On Demand

6.9.3.1 Overview

NE establishes a packet switched connection only when a message needs to be sent. This example shows connectivity settings of a Node.

Note: Check in Tools / Connection Manager whether the needed PS Profile, the SMS Modem Groups and the SMS Profile are created. If not create them.

Buttons: see chapter 6.9.5.1.

Common Connectivity Connectivity Mode: Displays the connectivity mode for connecting this NE.

A.I.M.O.S. A.I.M.O.S. related settings. Dial-Out Modem Group: A.I.M.O.S. SMS Modem Group. Used to send out an SMS that requests the NE to establish the network connection (Wake-up SMS). OMC IP Address: A.I.M.O.S. OMC IP Port: A.I.M.O.S.

Network Element: NE related settings. Only available settings are displayed. PS IP Address / IP Port: IP address and IP port of the NE connected via packet switched connection. SMS Phone Number: The SMS phone number of the NE. SMS Profile: NE SMS profile. Packet Switched Settings: NE PS profile. WEB-Login Configuration: see chapter 6.9.5.2. Alarm Type: see chapter 6.9.5.3. Inform Timeout: see chapter 6.9.5.3. Inform Retries: see chapter 6.9.5.3. Zone Change Traps: see chapter 6.9.5.4. WEB Server Configuration: see chapter 6.9.5.5.

Additional Information: see chapter 6.9.5.6.

Page 143: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 143

6.9.3.2 Change Connectivity Mode to Packet Switched On Demand

To change to packet switched on demand connection, proceed as shown in this example:

Step 1: Check in Tools / Connection Manager whether the needed PS

Profile, the SMS Modem Group and the SMS Profile are created. If not create them.

Step 2: Click Edit NE to edit the settings of the NE.

Step 3: Select connectivity mode Packet Switched On Demand.

Step 4: Select an SMS-capable SMS Modem Group in Dial Out Modem Group. This is necessary to send a wake-up-SMS to the NE to get the IP-Address of the NE.

Step 5: Select the PS Profile in Packet Switched Settings.

Step 6: Select the SMS Profile in SMS Profile. The SMS Service Center Number will be then read out from the SMS profile.

Step 7: Customize the other settings. Ensure there are no red marked lines.

Step 8. Confirm the window with OK.

Step 9: A.I.M.O.S. will establish a connection to the repeater showing the progress in an information window. Wait until A.I.M.O.S. displays the PS IP Address/IP Port transmitted from the repeater. The PS-connection is possible when the IP-Address is transmitted or manually entered.

Page 144: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 144 M0125ANA.DOC

6.9.4 Local Area Network

NE is within the same LAN like A.I.M.O.S. This example shows connectivity settings of an ION-M.

Buttons: see chapter 6.9.5.1.

Common Connectivity Connectivity Mode: Displays the connectivity mode for connecting this NE.

A.I.M.O.S. A.I.M.O.S. related settings. OMC IP Address: A.I.M.O.S. IP address. OMC IP Port: A.I.M.O.S. IP port.

Network Element: NE related settings. Only available settings are displayed. LAN IP Address / Port: IP address and IP port of the NE connected via LAN. WEB-Login Configuration: see chapter 6.9.5.2. Alarm Type: see chapter 6.9.5.3. Inform Timeout: see chapter 6.9.5.3. Inform Retries: see chapter 6.9.5.3. Zone Change Traps: see chapter 6.9.5.4. WEB Server Configuration: see chapter 6.9.5.5.

Additional Information: see chapter 6.9.5.6.

Page 145: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 145

6.9.5 Common Features and Settings for all Connection Types

6.9.5.1 Buttons

Sync NE: Click to synchronize the data from A.I.M.O.S. with the data set in the NE. An information window will pop up showing the processing of the job status. The status of the synchronizing will be marked additionally in the column Job Status of the NE Tree. Edit NE: Click to edit or to change the connectivity mode and/or the parameters of the NE.

6.9.5.2 WEB-Login Configuration

Choose the NE WEB Login Profile for the selected NE. For more information on this profile type refer to chapter 5.3.3.5. The example to the right is taken from a Circuit Switched connection.

Note: To set up an individual WEB-Login Configuration, select <no matching profile> to make the fields "Username" and "Password" visible / editable.

6.9.5.3 Alarm Type

Alarm reporting mode used by the NE; for restrictions see chapter 5.2.

Notification = unacknowledged mode. Alarm delivery is not reliable, an alarm can get lost along the transmission over the network.

Inform = acknowledged mode. Alarm delivery is reliable; every alarm will be retransmitted if necessary until A.I.M.O.S. confirms the delivery. Only if this type is chosen, the options Inform Timeout & Inform Retries are available for NEs supporting these features:

Inform Timeout: Set the period the NE shall wait if A.I.M.O.S. is not responding to an Inform message until the NE tries to send the message again.

Inform Retries: Set how many times an NE shall retry to send an Inform message if A.I.M.O.S. is not responding until the NE stops trying.

6.9.5.4 Zone Change Traps

If the check mark is set, the NE will send a trap each time it changes the zone. It is recommended to use this option only if absolutely necessary as it might result in a high number of traps being sent out.

Page 146: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 146 M0125ANA.DOC

6.9.5.5 WEB Server Configuration

Select which type of encryption is used by A.I.M.O.S. for accessing the corresponding NE selected in the NE Tree. Choose between: - HTTP only no encryption - HTTPS only HTTPS encryption will be used * - Standard Depending on the NE configuration: A.I.M.O.S. either uses

HTTP w/o encryption, even if an NE supports HTTPS (e. g. Node AM; in that case HTTPS can only be used from external sources), or automatically chooses HTTPS encryption for NEs supporting HTTPS.

* Please make sure that the selected NE supports HTTPS when choosing this encryption type and that a certificate installation is required for using HTTPS. For a detailed description refer to chapter 14.

6.9.5.6 Additional Information

These data are read only. Extended information, e. g. on the Revision Info, is available in the Maintenance tab (see chapter 6.8.3).

Sync Age: Date and time of the last synchronization.

Software Version (formerly ‘Agent Version’): Version of the NE SNMP Agent

Current MIB Version: Version of the NE-specific SNMP management information base (MIB).

WIP MIB Version: SNMP MIB version of the manufacturer used for A.I.M.O.S./NE communication (Common Part).

Sys Description: Short description of the NE.

Sys Contact: Contact info for technical support for the NE.

Sys Location: Location info of the NE.

6.9.6 VPN Connectivity Parameters

For NEs supporting VPN connectivity, the VPN section is provided below the A.I.M.O.S. section. When the corresponding check-mark is set and the setting is confirmed, the VPN parameters are displayed and can be edited via the Edit NE button:

Page 147: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 147

When the check-mark is removed, the latest settings will be displayed:

The following parameters can be edited:

Protcol: Specifies the VPN protocol: 0 = VPN is not supported; 1 = UDP; 2 = TCP

Main Server [x]* IP Address: IP address of main VPN server of VPN Server Group No. [x]. This server is contacted first. If connection fails (TIMEOUT), the UVS_BackupServerIP is contacted.

Main Server [x]* IP Port: IP port of main VPN server of VPN Server Group No. [x].

Backup Server [x]* IP Address: IP address of VPN backup server of VPN Server Group No. 1. This server is only contacted if UVS_MainServerIP of VPN Server Group No. [x] cannot be reached.

Backup Server [x]* IP Port: IP port of VPN backup server of VPN Server Group No. [x]. [x] stands for Server / Group numbers 1-4.

The following parameters are not editable:

Current Server IPAddress: VPN Client IP address of the NE

Server Assignment State: This field shows if the NE is assigned to a VPN Server Group: 0 = VPN is not supported; 1 = unassigned; 2 = assigned

Assigned Server Group: Group No. of the VPN server the NE is connected to

Connection Mode: Shows if VPN is actually active or not: 0 = VPN is not supported; 1 = failed; 2 = VPN mode is secure

VPN IP Address: IP address of the VPN server the NE is connected to

Page 148: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 148 M0125ANA.DOC

6.10 TOOL SCHEDULER (OPTION)

This optional tool is designed for the automization of Network Element Operations and to execute configuration changes on multiple NEs. Desired times for such operations can be set. The time schedule is configured and edited in the Scheduler menu of A.I.M.O.S. When this tool is licensed, alarm polling is available in the Scheduler only, and the parameters displayed in the Preferences Editor (chapter 5.2) will change accordingly.

Access to this tool and its features can be configured in the Account Manager rights as explained in chapter 5.4.2.

Start All Programs Andrew A.I.M.O.S. Visualization.

In the A.I.M.O.S. Visualization select Tools / Scheduler.

Schedule Info: General information about the schedule. * The following two fields are created automatically and cannot be changed: Date and Time of Creation: Date and Time of the schedule creation. Created by user: Name of the user who created the schedule.

Schedule Settings: Information about the time schedule settings. * Next Retry Run Time: Indicates when the next retry after a failed run is scheduled. Manual Start: To start a schedule manually, click the Start Now button.

Schedule Connectivity Settings: Information about the connectivity settings. *

* see tab Schedule (chapter 6.10.1.1) for more detailed explanations

Page 149: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 149

Buttons:

Click New to create a schedule (see next chapter).

Click Edit NE Filter to modify the filter criteria of a schedule (see chapters 6.10.1.2 and 6.4.3.2).

Click Edit Actions to edit the Scheduler actions (see chapters 6.10.1.3 and 6.10.3).

Click View Runs to display the progress and result of a schedule in the Schedule Runs window.

Click Start Now to start a schedule manually. To create a new schedule, either click the New button or use the menu item Scheduler New Schedule. Then, continue as follows:

6.10.1 Customizing a Schedule

6.10.1.1 Step 1: Tab Schedule - Customize the Schedule

Name: The first schedule name will be created automatically as Schedule 101. The number is incremented automatically when creating additional schedules. The name should be changed to indicate the purpose of the schedule. Comment: This optional entry field can be filled with additional information to further identify the schedule.

Page 150: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 150 M0125ANA.DOC

Schedule Kind: Choose between four options:

Choose XML-Import to import XML files into the A.I.M.O.S. database. For details see chapter 6.10.2. (The tabs Network Elements and Actions are not required and will thus no longer be provided for creating this schedule.)

Choose Network Element Actions to customize the available NE Actions in tab Actions (see chapters 6.10.1.3 and 6.10.3).

Choose System Actions to customize the creation of performance data charts. Consequently, in tab Actions (see chapter 6.10.1.3) only this specific action is available (see chapter 6.10.3.5) and the tab Network Elements is not required. It will thus no longer be provided for creating such a schedule.

Choose Export Actions to make the action ‘Create Export’ (see chapter 6.10.3.8) available.

Time Plan Settings: Select a time interval Once, Several Times a Day, Daily, Weekly, Monthly the schedule shall run. Default setting is Once. Define the start time of the schedule with the calendar. Next Run Time: This field indicates the next execution date and time according to the Time Plan Settings with the check-mark enabled. Failed Run: Number of Retries: Set the number of retries for the schedule. Failed Run: Retry Interval: Set the interval between the retries for the schedule. Enabled: Set the check-mark to enable the schedule. Connectivity Settings:

Modem Group Name: Leave this field empty (= default) to force the Scheduler to maintain circuit switched connections as defined for each NE. If the schedule should run using a separate Modem Group for circuit switched connections, specify that group here.

Modem: Max. Wait Minutes: This setting defines the max. time the scheduler will wait to acquire access to a modem.

Modem: Max Connect Attempts: Maximum attempts to connect a single NE.

NE: Sequential Delay Seconds: Interval time between finishing a scheduled job (NE A) and starting another scheduled job (NE B) within the same schedule; valid for all connection types. The default setting of 0 minutes is recommended because otherwise (setting >0) the NEs will be processed sequentially and not in parallel, which might lead to a slow performance.

Possible use case: The activation of the heartbeat can be distributed in a time range of 24 hours. The heartbeat of 100 repeaters shall be sent to A.I.M.O.S. once a day.

A sequential interval value of 600 seconds will distribute the execution of the heartbeat activation to ensure a consistent workload of the connection.

Page 151: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 151

6.10.1.2 Step 2: Tab Network Elements - Customize the Network Elements

The available filter criteria that can be set in the Schedule Wizard are exactly the same as in the filter builder of the NE Tree. For a detailed description of them please refer to chapter 6.4.3.2 Filter Settings.

To select a filter click the respective filter tab under the menu bar. Use the arrow button to scroll through the tabs if the list is longer and exceeds the screen width.

Use the buttons Add or Delete to add or to delete a filter.

Click to get the amount of repeaters matching your filter settings:

Use the button Show in Tree to visualize your filter definition in the NE Tree.

Upon leaving the Scheduler you will be asked whether this filter definition should become a Custom Filter in the NE Tree – as if it was created by the NE Filter Builder (described in chapter 6.4.3 Network Element Filter) – or not.

Note: If you decide to make it the custom filter definition, please consider that only one custom filter is possible.

As default, filters are created as dynamic filters by the Schedule Wizard. For converting a dynamic into a static filter the Convert into Static Filter button is provided. For details about filter types and their conversion refer to chapter 6.4.3.4.

Page 152: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 152 M0125ANA.DOC

6.10.1.3 Step 3: Tab Actions - Customize the Actions

Select one or more action(s) the scheduler shall run. For more details on the Scheduler Actions see chapter 6.10.3.

Note: When System Actions is chosen as Schedule Kind in the Schedule tab of the Schedule Wizard (see chapter 6.10.1.1), only the action Create Performance Data Chart (see chapter 6.10.3.5) is available.

All available schedule actions are listed left-hand. Mark the action you want to perform and click Add. It will be listed in the selected schedule actions right-hand.

Some actions require additional settings. To customize those actions press the Edit button. If this button is disabled (gray), there is no need for additional settings.

Use the buttons Up and Down to change the order of the selected schedule action.

Use the button Delete to remove an action.

Not until Schedule, Network Elements, and Actions are completed, the button OK will be activated. Step 4: Click OK: Use Cancel to abort the Scheduler.

Page 153: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 153

6.10.2 XML Import

Three different types of XML imports are available; sample XML files for all are available in the folder \Program Files\Andrew\A.I.M.O.S.\XML. Depending on the file type selected in the field XML Import File Name, the according type will be displayed accordingly in the XML Import Type field. The available file types are:

New Network Element(s): The creation of this type of file for xml import is described in section 6.2.1 File.

Node G Frequency Setting(s): The creation is user-specific. The creation of this type of file for xml import is described in section 6.2.1 File.

Importable xml file. The creation of this type of file for xml import is described in section 6.10.3.8 Create Export.

The same folder also contains the corresponding XML-Schemas (.xsd). The XML-Schema is used to express a set of rules to which the XML document must conform in order to be considered 'valid'.

DO NOT MAKE ANY CHANGES IN THE XML SCHEMAS (.xsd).

XML files can be edited with an XML Editor (e.g. ‘Microsoft XML Notepad’).

Page 154: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 154 M0125ANA.DOC

Sample of an XML Schema:

a) Import of new Network Elements (NEs)

This import can be used for bulk integration of NEs. Fill XML file with required data (‘component name’, type of NE Type, Connection Type, IP Address, IP Port, Modem Group, Modem, Phone Number). See sample file for details.

In the Schedule Wizard, the field “XML-File Location“ must be set to “Client”:

Page 155: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 155

Press ‘Import XML’ button.

Define/able schedule for auto-integration of NEs into A.I.M.O.S.

b) Import of Node G channel settings

This import can be used for (recurring) changes of NodeG channel settings.

It is recommended to create/fill the XML file via a ‘frequency planning tool’.

In the Schedule Wizard, the field “XML-File Location“ must be set to “Client”, as shown under c).

Press ‘Import XML’ button.

Define/able schedule for (recurring) changes of Node G channel settings.

Page 156: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 156 M0125ANA.DOC

c) Importable xml file

o The file to be imported must be located in “~\Andrew\AIMOS\UploadFiles\OMC“, i.e. if the file to be imported is generated automatically and is also to be imported automatically (= without changing the schedule), the file must always be available in this location under the same name.

o In the field “XML-File Location“, the setting “Server“ is obligatory. If it is not possible to select a file or not the file desired in the next field “XML Import File“, check in the Connector Log file or in the Log Manager whether validation of this file was successful. In case validation has failed, the log shows the message “Failed to parse“. Additionally, the log contains information as to why validation has failed. Only if errors have occurred, the Schedule Wizard must be started anew after they have been corrected; then, selecting the file will be possible.

If an xml file that has already been selected in the Scheduler is changed later, the file is automatically validated afterwards. In case of an error the corresponding error message “Failed to parse” will also be shown in the Connector Log file. In case of a successful validation the message (also when the schedule is started) is: “Reflect [x] changes to the database”. Please note: in case of a validation error no “View Runs” entry will be made as the prerequsites for a “Run” have not been fulfilled.

Page 157: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 157

o Irrespective of the XML validation by A.I.M.O.S., validation can also be done separately using a suitable XML Tool and the XML schema “~\Andrew\AIMOS\XML\AIMOS_Import_CM.xsd“. In case of an automated generation of the file to be imported, validating the generated file automatically with the schema provided and a suitable XML Tool before the import is recommended.

o Validation is done both when the schedule is generated and when it is executed.

For more details and for xml export information, see also chapter 6.10.3.8 in this manual as well as document “XML Interface Description” (M0125B7x_XML_IF_AIMOS_Vx.pdf).

6.10.3 Scheduler Actions

The Schedule Actions Editor opens when the Edit Actions button in the main window of the Scheduler is clicked. The available choice of actions can vary depending on the system configuration and on the selection made under ‘Schedule Kind’ in the Schedule tab of the Schedule Wizard (see chapter 6.10.1.1):

Note: For a better overview, the list of displayed actions can be reduced by entering a short keyword (e.g. RSSI) in the ‘Available Actions Filter’ field, and only the actions corresponding to this keyword will be shown.

To edit an action, highlight it in the left part of the window and click the Add button. The highlighted action is then displayed in the right part of the window, as well, and can be edited by clicking the Edit button. If this button is disabled (gray), there is no need for additional settings.

Page 158: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 158 M0125ANA.DOC

In the Actions tab of the Schedule wizard (see chapter 6.10.1.3) an action can be selected for a schedule.

Some actions are uniquely available in the Scheduler and will be explained individually, i.e.:

Event Triggered Actions see chapter 6.10.3.1

File Upload see chapter 6.10.3.2

Software Update see chapter 6.10.3.3

Read Performance Data see chapter 6.10.3.4 Currently only available for Node C, G, or M except two-box (DCM1 units) with a SW version <1.5.

Create Performance Data Chart see chapter 6.10.3.5 Uniquely available when ‘System Actions’ is chosen as Schedule Kind in the Schedule tab of the Schedule Wizard (see chapter 6.10.1.1).

Configure Node A User see chapter 6.10.3.6 Available for Node A only.

Configure ION-M User see chapter 6.10.3.7

Suppress Mobile Radio Signal Use this action to switch off the RF during certain time periods.

Copy NE Configuration see description below Use this action to select an NE backup file (created before) in order to transfer it

to other NEs (of the same type):

Available for NEs of the NodeX type only.

Create Export see chapter 6.10.3.8 Only available when ‘Export Actions’ is chosen as Schedule Kind in the Schedule tab of the Schedule Wizard (see chapter 6.10.1.1).

Run External Tool Use this action to start external tools (e.g. exe or batch files) via A.I.M.O.S. A corresponding profile must have been created in the External Tool Profiles (see chapter 6.17.6) before.

Select the External Tool Profile to be executed and confirm with OK.

Page 159: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 159

Most of the actions correspond to a Network Element Operations (accessible by a right-mouse click or via the menu Tree Network) or to a feature in a tab of the Functions Bar. These actions and the corresponding operation / feature are:

Scheduler Action Network Element Operation Try Connection Try Connection Send Config SMS Send Configuration Read Unique System ID Query All – Unique System ID

Read Unique System ID Read Network Structure Query All – Network Structure Query All Params Query All – Parameter Settings Query Actual State Query All – Current State Values Query Alarms Query All – Active Alarms / Query Alarms Read Hardware Inventory Data Read HID’s Synchronize Time Set Time * Reboot Network Element Reboot Create NE Configuration Backup Backup * In the NE operation the time can also be set freely, while the Scheduler action always sets the current time.

For details refer to the corresponding Network Element Operation in chapter 6.7.

Scheduler Action Tab Configuration Configure Alarm Severity Alarm Settings Configure Heartbeat Heartbeat Read HW/RF Data HW-RF / Sync NE Set Frequency Allocation for Node x (not available for all Node A types) Set Pilot Power to Total Power Ratio for Node x

HW-RF

Configure A.I.M.O.S. Dial-In (use to set Dial-In parameters) Connectivity Configure NE Connectivity (use to set the parameters Alarm Type, Inform Timeout, Inform Retries, Zone Change Traps, WEB Server Configuration, as well as the VPN Connectivity Parameters).

Connectivity

Scheduler Action Tab Maintenance Restore Most Recent Backup Backup/Restore

For details refer to the corresponding feature in chapter 6.8.2 Configuration, 6.9 Configuration - Connectivity, or 6.8.3 Maintenance.

6.10.3.1 Event Triggered Actions

In case the ‘Event Triggered Actions‘ are selected, one of the following actions will be performed depending on the selection made under “…having received event:” in Step 2 (see chapter 6.10.1.2).

Page 160: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 160 M0125ANA.DOC

a) Alarm: System Configuration Changed

If the NE has sent a ‘config has changed’ message, an automatic sync between NE database and A.I.M.O.S. database will be triggered by performing the following commands:

‘Read Network Structure’ (=Topology) ‘Query all Params’ ‘Query Actual State’ ‘Read Hardware Inventory Data’

b) Alarm: CA List Change Alarm

If the NE (Node G only) has sent a 'CA list change alarm'-'clear' (!) trap, the following action is performed:

‘Read HW/RF Data’

Page 161: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 161

c) Notification: System Startup If the NE has sent a ‘system is up and running’ message,

or

d) Alarm: Alarm Queue Overflow If the NE (ION only) has sent an 'Alarm Queue Overflow' message,

this schedule triggers an automatic alarm sync by performing the following action:

‘Query Alarms’

e) Alarm: System Replaced This action will send the according configuration file (as determined by the selected Configuration Group; see chapter 6.4.3.2 Filter Settings) to the NE. From A.I.M.O.S. V2.5 this feature is only available for Node AM repeaters, however, further NEs may be included in future releases. f) Clear: System Off Duty If the NE Alarm 'System Off Duty' has been cleared (currently Node AM only), A.I.M.O.S. triggers an automatic sync between NE database and A.I.M.O.S. database, performing the following commands:

'Read Network Structure' (= Topology); not applicable for NodeAM; 'Query all Params' 'Query Actual State' 'Query Alarms' 'Read Hardware Inventory Data' 'Read HW/RF data'

Note: Once the ‘Event Triggered Actions’ are selected, the ‘detailed actions’ (which show up in brackets) are performed automatically, it is NOT required to add any other actions. Nevertheless it is possible to add other actions too.

Page 162: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 162 M0125ANA.DOC

6.10.3.2 File Upload

To upload configuration files to NEs from A.I.M.O.S. an according schedule has to be customized in the Scheduler (a schedule is also required for a manual upload start). Before starting with the schedule, make sure that the required configuration files have been made available at the A.I.M.O.S. server via the following path (NodeA for NodeA/-AM or MC for ION-M):

Then, create a schedule for the upload by clicking the New button and proceed as follows: 1. Tab Schedule

Enter a name for the Schedule and the Time Plan Settings. Regarding the Time Plan observe that there are two options.

If desired, the time for the file upload can be explicitly set by entering the specific time and date. However, the schedule can also be used to start uploads manually (which will be the more common practice) by entering a point in time in the past in this field and setting the Run Schedule field to Once.

If a time in the future was set, the ‘Next Run Time’ (formerly ‘Next Execution Date/Time’) will be displayed in the according field after the Schedule is “Enabled” by setting the check-mark. The field stays empty after enabling if a time in the past was set.

Page 163: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 163

2. Tab Network Elements

Enter the Type and Sub Type of the NE for which the upload shall be carried out in the according fields.

3. Tab Actions

Choose the action Upload Repeater File and click the Add button. When the action is displayed under the Selected Schedule Actions, click the Edit button:

Select the configuration file for the according NE type and confirm with OK:

The schedule is now customized. Confirm the Schedule Wizard with OK.

Page 164: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 164 M0125ANA.DOC

If the Time Plan Settings were set to a time in the past, the following message will be prompted:

If this message is answered with Yes, the set Time Plan Settings will be ignored and the upload will start automatically at an early point in time set by the system. To be able to start the upload manually, answer this message with No.

Page 165: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 165

4. Starting the File Upload

To start the upload manually, select the according schedule in the Scheduler (by clicking in a field of the corresponding schedule column) and click the Start Now button of the Schedule Settings (see chapter 6.10).

By clicking the View Runs button the progress of the upload will be displayed in the Schedule Runs window:

When the upload is finished, this will also be stated in the Schedule Runs window. To see more details (or in case the upload could not be completed successfully), use the buttons View Results or Log Manager (see also chapter 6.13 Tool Log Manager) where more extensive information will be provided.

Page 166: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 166 M0125ANA.DOC

6.10.3.3 Software Update

To carry out a software update from A.I.M.O.S. for a certain type of NE an according schedule has to be customized in the Scheduler (a schedule is also required for a manual update start).

Before starting with the schedule, the required update file (zip format) which has been provided by CommScope must be filed in the corresponding folder of the A.I.M.O.S. server.

Thus, after having received the zip file from CommScope, file it under:

For a Node A update, file the corresponding zip file in the NodA folder, which also serves for Node A+ or Node AM update files

The MC folder is provided for ION-M update files.

An update via A.I.M.O.S. is not possible for other NE types (Node C, G, M, MRx18, or ION-B).

Creating subfolders for various update files is not necessary as each zip file can be uniquely distinguished by its name which includes the NE type and SW version, e.g.:

For ION-M the name of the file is ION-M_Vx.y.z.zip, where x.y.z represents

the SW version to be uploaded. Depending on the Update contents two files may be provided, which have the same name but differ considerably in size. In this case, using the smaller file is recommended for A.I.M.O.S.

Please consider in advance whether the update should be carried out in two steps (first, all the update files will be transferred to the individual NEs one by one, and in a second step, which can also be started later, the update will be activated in the NEs) or whether the update should be activated in an NE directly after the files were transferred (immediate activation) *. Please observe, however, that in the latter case the time span between the activation of the SW update of the first and of the last NE in line is very long, since much time must be calculated for the file transfer. If the files are transferred in a first step to all NEs, the time span for the activation procedure itself will be much shorter. * For NEs of type Node A only the immediate activation is available; for Node AM and Node A+ both

schedule options are possible.

In any case, a schedule must be created for the update by clicking the New button and proceeding as follows:

Page 167: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 167

1. Tab Schedule

Enter a name for the Schedule and the Time Plan Settings. Regarding the Time Plan observe that there are two options.

If this is desired, the time for the SW update can be explicitly set by entering the specific time and date. However, the schedule can also be used to start the update manually (which will be the more common practice) by entering a point in time in the past in this field and setting the Run Schedule field to Once.

If a time in the future was set, the ‘Next Run Time’ (formerly ‘Next Execution Date/Time’) will be displayed in the according field after the Schedule is “Enabled” by setting the check-mark. The field stays empty after enabling if a time in the past was set.

2. Tab Network Elements

Enter the Type and Sub Type of the NE for which the update shall be carried out in the according fields.

Page 168: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 168 M0125ANA.DOC

3. Tab Actions

Choose the action Update Repeater Software and click the Add button. When the action is displayed under the Selected Schedule Actions, click the Edit button:

Select the NE Type to be updated (Node A must be also chosen for Node AM or Node A+).

Depending on the NE Type chosen, the system prompts the available update files (file format “.zip”) for this type in the SW File field. Select the correct zip file for the NEs to be updated.

Page 169: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 169

In the field Mode select the update mode:

If the update should be carried out in two steps (first file transfer to all NEs and then activation), choose the option “Upload”. If the activation for each NE should start directly after the file transfer, choose the option “Upload with immediate Activation” (observe that if a Node A SW File has been selected, only the “immediate Activation” mode is possible).

Confirm your choices with OK. This schedule is now customized. Confirm the Schedule Wizard with OK.

If the Time Plan Settings were set to a time in the past, the following message will be prompted:

If this message is answered with Yes, the set Time Plan Settings will be ignored and the SW update will start automatically at an early point in time set by the system. To be able to start the SW update manually, answer this message with No. 4. Activating the SW Update

If the option “Upload with immediate Activation” was selected in step 3, only this schedule is required. In this case please proceed directly with step 5.

Otherwise, a second schedule must be created for the activation.

To do so, repeat steps 1 to 3 as explained above but observe the following:

Page 170: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 170 M0125ANA.DOC

In the tab Schedule (step 1) the name entered for the schedule must differ from the name of the first schedule, e. g.:

In tab Actions (step 3) choose the action Activation.

Then, continue as explained in the above before proceeding with step 5.

5. Starting the SW Update

To start the update manually, select the according schedule(s)* in the Scheduler (by clicking in a field of the corresponding schedule column) and click the Start Now button of the Schedule Settings (see chapter 6.10).

* If two schedules have been created for the SW update (file transfer and activation separate), start the file transfer, first, and after the transfer is finished start the schedule for the activation. It is also possible to wait some time in between the two schedules.

By clicking the View Runs button the progress of the upload will be displayed in the Schedule Runs window:

When the upload is finished, this will also be stated in the Schedule Runs window. To see more details (or in case the upload could not be completed successfully), use the buttons View Results or Log Manager (see also chapter 6.13 Tool Log Manager) where even more extensive information will be provided.

Page 171: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 171

6.10.3.4 Read Performance Data

Explanation:

Performance data are saved to the A.I.M.O.S. database and can then be used by the Tool Performance Manager (Option) described in chapter 6.16, if this tool is licensed (Node X and ION). In addition, csv files are saved to the hard disc of the A.I.M.O.S. server (Node X only).

For NEs of the Node X type observe the following:

Before carrying out such a schedule, the corresponding performance data to be queried have to be configured on the website of the Node. For details on performance data configuration, see Software Manual of the Node X.

If the data are to be used for comparative purposes, make sure that all Nodes are set to the same time (UTC time, not local time). To set the correct time, use the NE Operation “Set Time” (see section 6.7).

In case of a Node AM, the GPS statistics will be queried as well and written into the A.I.M.O.S. folder on the A.I.M.O.S. server. They will not be used by the Performance Manager.

Application:

If no Performance Manager license is installed, only the (Node X) csv files can be used for evaluation with a 3rd party tool (e.g. Excel).

With a Performance Manager license performance data can be evaluated with the tool Performance Manager (see chapter 6.16).

Do not use this action at an interval of <15 minutes since the minimal measurement interval is currently 15 minutes. Procedure:

Start the Schedule action as explained in chapter 6.10.1.3 and the following steps will be carried out automatically:

Node X only: At the first start, all available data dating back up to one week are saved to the hard disk (~\Andrew\AIMOS\Bin\NodeXStatisticsDownload) of the A.I.M.O.S. server as "[NE Unique System ID]_[date of performance data, 8-digit].csv".

Node X and ION: All data are saved to the A.I.M.O.S. data base and can be graphically visualized by the Performance Manager. Logging:

Failure, warning and other information messages are stored in the Log Manger tool (see chapter 6.13). In case of failure, please send the generated file(s) to Technical Support (see also chapter 10.2).

Page 172: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 172 M0125ANA.DOC

6.10.3.5 Create Performance Data Chart

This action is uniquely available when System Actions is chosen as Schedule Kind in the Schedule tab of the Schedule Wizard (see chapter 6.10.1.1).

It can be used to generate charts * pre-defined in the Tool Performance Manager (Option) described in chapter 6.16 to be sent out via mail at specified intervals.

* For NEs of the Node X type the Read Performance Data schedule (see section 6.10.3.4) must be carried out before these charts can be provided by the Performance Manager.

Upon adding the action to the Selected Schedule Actions (Add button) and clicking the Edit button, the following window will open:

Chart Name: Select a chart from the list. This list contains all charts available in the Performance Manager.

User Name: Select the user from the list.

eMail Receipient: Enter a mail address to which the created charts should be sent.

For general information about customizing an action please refer to chapter 6.10.1.3.

Page 173: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 173

6.10.3.6 Configure Node A User

Use this action to configure (or change) up to 6 users for Node AM* Network Elements by specifying Role Name, User Name and Password. Configuring User 1 (= Super User) and User 2 (= Operator User) is mandatory, all other users are optional. A user for whom no data are entered (marked <empty>) will not be created. *this action is currently not available for other NE types

Note: Please observe to enter all data completely in this mask since only the data entered here will be valid after the scheduled action has been performed. Thus, when a single user is to be changed make sure the data for all the other users are still specified correctly in the schedule, otherwise they will be changed, too, according to the data in the schedule or even deleted if they are marked <empty>.

Thus, to delete a User remove all entered data so that it will be again marked <empty> before performing the action again.

Use the field ‚WEB User Management’ to activate / deactivate the configuration of a Node AM via Web.

For changing passwords please observe that the following restrictions laid down in the tab Security of the Server Configuration (see 5.1.3.1) do also apply here: - General Password Settings - Minimum Password Length * - Password Security Level * Please observe that for this action the value entered for the Minimum Password Length must not

exceed 16 characters.

Page 174: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 174 M0125ANA.DOC

6.10.3.7 Configure ION-M User

Use this action to configure (or change) a user for ION-M Network Elements by specifying User Manager, Password Duration in Days, User Name, Password, and Password Expiration.

The following entries are possible:

- The User Manager can be entered solely only the User Manager will be adjusted.

- Duration can be entered solely only the Duration will be adjusted.

- User Name and both password fields can be filled in solely on all MCs with the corresponding User the password will be adjusted.

- User Name and expiration fields can be filled in solely on all MCs with the corresponding User the expiration will be adjusted.

- The four rules above can be combined without restrictions.

Notes:

If User Manager = AIMOS, the passwords must be 8 digits long and correspond to the Password Security Level set in the Server Configuration / Configuration Tool (see chapter 5.1.3.1 Password Settings).

If User Manager = NE, the password must be 8 digits long and correspond to the following Security Level of the Server Configuration / Configuration Tool (see chapter 5.1.3.1 Password Settings):

Page 175: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 175

6.10.3.8 Create Export

When ‘Export Actions’ is chosen as Schedule Kind in the Schedule tab of the Schedule Wizard (see section 6.10.1.1), the action ‘Create Export’ – by which most exports of the Tool Network Element List (section 6.11) can be executed automatically – is available.

As for all other scheduled tasks the following criteria are specified via the Scheduler homepage (see page 148) and in the Schedule Wizard:

The time of execution for the export is defined in Step 1 of the Schedule Wizard under ‘Time Plan Settings’ (see also section 6.10.1.1).

Network Elements to be included into the export are selected via the ‘Edit NE Filter’ button of the Scheduler homepage ( see also Step 2 of the Schedule Wizard, section 6.10.1.2).

Choose the action Create Export to specify how data are to be exported and depending on the Selected Schedule Action, proceed as follows: A) Create Network Element List Export

These exports can be configured in the Export Profiles of the Tool Profiles (section 6.17.5).

Configure the Create Export window as follows:

Profile Name: All profiles created in the "Export Profiles" (section 6.17.5) are available.

Destination: Specify the destination to which the data are to be exported. A write permission for the selected folder is required.

Type: Define the type of document (xml or Excel) to be created. B) Create Importable XML Export

For details and for xml import information, see also chapter 6.10.2 in this manual as well as document “XML Interface Description” (M0125B7x_XML_IF_AIMOS_Vx.pdf).

The following example illustrates how an xml export is done by configuring the corresponding schedule:

Page 176: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 176 M0125ANA.DOC

a) Schedule Tab

b) Network Elements Tab

Page 177: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 177

c) Actions Tab

Step 1: Press ‘Edit’ button and select folder to which xml file should be saved:

Page 178: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 178 M0125ANA.DOC

Step 2: If you want to start the schedule right away, click the ‘Start Now’-Button, otherwise use the Time Plan Settings for this schedule:

Step 3: When the Schedule is finished (this may take some time), the xml file is

saved in the folder specified in step 1.

Page 179: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 179

6.11 TOOL NETWORK ELEMENT LIST

Access to this tool can be configured in the Account Manager rights as explained in chapter 5.4.2.

In A.I.M.O.S. Visualization select Tools / Network Element List.

This tool gives an overview of all installed NEs and their subunits. By default all network elements are displayed. Use ‘Select a View’ to choose a specific view from the list box.

The listing can be customized by sort options and filters.

Note: For setting filters to customize the screen display and for saving this customized view, refer to chapter 6.4.1 Table Filters.

With the different tabs filtered views can easily be displayed.

Via the ‘Export Profiles’ (of the Tool Profiles) and the Scheduler Action ‘Create Export’ exporting these views is also possible. See sections 6.17.5 and 6.10.3.8. Buttons:

Button Show in Tree serves to use the filtered NE List as a filter for the NE Tree.

Button Locate highlights the selected device in the NE Tree.

Button (Excel-)Export saves the sorted and filtered data into an Excel file.

Button Refresh updates the displayed list.

Page 180: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 180 M0125ANA.DOC

6.12 TOOL JOB MONITOR

Please observe that access to this tool can be configured in the Account Manager rights as explained in chapter 5.4.2.

In A.I.M.O.S. Visualization select Tools / Job Monitor.

This tool lists all current jobs. The list of jobs can be saved as Excel file with the (Excel-)Export button.

Set the Fade Out time in seconds to adjust the time, jobs are listed after their completion.

6.13 TOOL LOG MANAGER

The Log Manager displays the complete logs that are generated by the A.I.M.O.S. Connector service. Access to this tool can be configured in the Account Manager rights as explained in chapter 5.4.2.

In A.I.M.O.S. Visualization select Tools / Log Manager.

Click the buttons “Prev Anomaly or “Next Anomaly“, to highlight Warnings and Errors, and to jump to previous or following ones.

The tool is also accessible as follows: as menu item: by a right mouse-click in NE Tree or via menu ‘Tree’ as button: in the ‘Connectivity Manager’ in the window opened by ‘Discover

Modems’ (see 5.3.1) in the dialogue for creating new NEs (see 6.5) in all windows opened by NE Operations except ‘Delete Pending Configuration Data’

Page 181: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 181

Timestamp: Date and/or time the log event occurred. Message: Log/Alarm message. Severity: Possible states of the severity can be: Info, Warning, Error, Severe. Please note that these states are not identical with the alarm severities of the NEs configured in A.I.M.O.S. NE Number: An automatically generated A.I.M.O.S. internal number of the NE. SDN: The system distinguished name (SDN) is an A.I.M.O.S. internal identification name of the NE. Component Name: The user defined name of the NE. Thread: Short name of the functional module of the Connector service; useful to identify the general domain that a log line applies to. Thread Name: Like Thread; long name. Direction: The direction will be displayed only if any communication takes place. The following directions can be displayed: SB out, SB in, SNMP NB, NB out, NB in, Unspec in, Unspec out. Log Kind: Specifies the kind of the log. The following log kinds can occur: communication = interpreted data by the Connector service; communication raw: uninterpreted data; connectivity = belongs to dial-up; data base = the Connector service accesses the database; program condition = each kind which can not assigned to one of the possible log kinds. Command: Displays the command which caused this log line. Modem Number: An automatically generated A.I.M.O.S. internal identification number of the modem. Communication Resource: Displays which communication takes place, Modem or LAN. User Number: An automatically generated A.I.M.O.S. internal identification number of the user. MCNC: The A.I.M.O.S. internal unique identifier for network providers consists of the MCC and the MNC. User Name: Displays the user sending the command shown in column 'Command'. Automatically generated alarms are not allocated to a user name. Schedule Run: Logs that were created by the Scheduler are listed in this column.

Note: From V2.6 onwards Account Manager actions as well as Visu logins and logouts will also be logged in the Log Manager. Check Boxes

These two check boxes are helpful if it is necessary to view logs lines exactly.

Active: Remove the check-mark to deactivate the log recording. After setting the check-mark again the log manager will start listing again. The logs accumulated during the break remain in the Connector service cache.

Autoscroll: Remove the check-mark to deactivate the automatic jump to the last line of the log list. Set the check-mark to activate the autoscroll again.

Page 182: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 182 M0125ANA.DOC

Buttons Clear: Clears the window. The logs will not be deleted permanently in the Connector service. Excel Export: Saves the visible logs as Excel file. Log Files: The logs will be saved automatically every day. Use this button to open a specific log file as csv-file. The most recent 30 log files are listed and sorted by date. Double-click a date or click Get the File to open the zipped file in a new window. Open the displayed csv-file in Excel with a double-click. Log Profiles: The selected profile determines the content and volume of the logs. Possible Profiles are: Minimum, Standard, Extended and Maximum. It is recommended to select Minimum or Standard for the operating state. Extended or Maximum should only be set after consultation with Andrew support.

6.14 TOOL MAP (OPTION) Please observe that this tool has to prepared (before A.I.M.O.S. is installed) as explained in chapter 4.1.2 Map (Optional Tool) and that access to this tool can be configured in the Account Manager rights (chapter 5.4.2). The possibility to drag and drop NEs to this tool depends on the Topology rights of the Account Manager.

The tool Map allows displaying all NEs with their location in maps.

Prior to using tool Map: - a license for A.I.M.O.S. with Map has to be installed - Microsoft® MapPoint 2006 or 2009 with the correct maps (e.g. for Europe or the

US) has to be installed. If MapPoint is installed without maps, only a grey map without content is displayed.

The display of maps can be customized. Please see chapter 6.14.12.

In A.I.M.O.S. Visualization select Tools / Map.

Drag folders or NEs to be displayed from the NE Tree and drop them at a map.

6.14.1 Buttons

Use the”Zoom In“ and “Zoom Out“ buttons to adjust the resolution of the map.

”Parent Map” switches to the higher-level map.

”Locate in Tree” switches to the NE Tree of A.I.M.O.S. and highlights the selected NEs.

Page 183: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 183

6.14.2 Assign a Bitmap to a Folder

Preparation: Create a folder in the NE Tree. Move at least one NE into this new folder and place the NE on the vector map.

How to: Right-click the new folder and select “Map-Assign Map to Folder” from the context menu. Select a bitmap (.bmp) with at least 300x300 pixels, a smaller bitmap does not make much sense. You may have to press F5 in the NE Tree to update the NE Tree and NE Map.

Verification: The NE located in the folder should vanish from the vector map due to the fact, that an NE can only be placed on its parent map. You can then drag and drop the folder onto the vector map and it should behave like a normal NE. Check the summary alarm of the folder. Try to drag the NE subunits onto the vector map; it should no longer be possible, but it should be possible to drag them onto the bitmap. You can open the bitmap by double-clicking the selected folder icon on the vector map or selecting “Map Show Map” from the context menu in the NE Tree.

6.14.3 Assign a Bitmap to a Subfolder of a Bitmap Folder

Preparation: You can assign a bitmap to folders, which are placeable on the parent bitmap (drag-and-drop).

How to: Assign a second bitmap to a subfolder. Press F5 if the NE Tree does not refresh. The folder should then be dragable to the parent bitmap.

Verification: The newly assigned bitmap folder and its NE subunits should behave like a bitmap folder that has the vector map as parent. The folder itself should only be dragable to the parent bitmap; all its NE subunits should only be dragable onto the newly assigned bitmap.

6.14.4 Remove a Bitmap from a Folder

How to: Right click a folder with a bitmap assigned in the NE Tree of A.I.M.O.S. and select “Map Delete Map from folder” from the context menu.

Verification: The folder icon should be removed from the vector map / parent map. The NE subunits should reappear on the parent map, if they were placed before the map was assigned to the folder, but this only works correctly with the vector map until now. Anyway, the NE subunits should be placeable onto the parent map now.

6.14.5 Show a Folder Bitmap as Map

How to: Select a folder with a bitmap assigned in the vector map, so it gets highlighted. Double-click on the highlighted icon in the map or select “Map Show Map” of the NE context menu in the NE Tree.

Verification: The bitmap you did assign to the folder should show up instead of the vector map. The Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons should be disabled. The “Parent Map” button should be enabled. You can now drag and drop NEs located in the folder onto the map. The behavior of NEs on the bitmap should correspond to their behavior on the vector map. Pressing the button “Parent Map” should get you back to the vector map.

Page 184: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 184 M0125ANA.DOC

6.14.6 Show a Sub-Bitmap as Map

Preparation: You can assign a Bitmap to folders, which are placeable on the parent bitmap (drag-and-drop).

How to: Select a folder with a bitmap assigned located on a bitmap of a folder, so it gets highlighted. Double-click on the highlighted icon in the bitmap or select “Map Show Map” of the NE context menu in the NE Tree.

Verification: The bitmap should exactly behave like a bitmap located on the vector map. Pressing the button “Parent Map” should get you back to the parent bitmap.

6.14.7 Including NEs to the Vector Map

6.14.7.1 RF Units

Preparation: Align the “Map Window” window to the left of the screen and move the main window out of the right side of the screen, so you can still see the NE Tree.

How to: Pick an RF unit, not included in a bitmap assigned folder and drag-and-drop it onto the “Map Window”.

RF units are: • Folder with assigned bitmap • MR repeater • Node A • Node C • Node M • Node G • SMS

Verification: The NE should appear on the “Map Window” at the place you did drop it. If the NE has no alarm, the icon should be the icon for this NE type. It should be selected in the “Map Window” and have no additional colored ring around. If this NE is in alarm mode, it should have a ring around, colored with the color of highest severity this NE has at the moment. Whenever a severity changes, the icon should change automatically.

6.14.7.2 Optical Systems

Preparation: Align the “Map Window” window to the left of the screen and move the main window out of the right side of the screen, so you can still see the NE Tree.

How to: Pick an optical NE not included in a bitmap assigned folder and drag-and-drop it onto the “Map Window”. The upcoming confirmation box should once be answered with “Yes”. After you have confirmed the result, you should drag the same NE once again onto the map, answering “No” to the confirmation box.

Optical systems are: • BCA – Britecell • MC – Master Controller • MOR – Optical Repeater

The includable subunits are: • BCL3 – Britecell Level 3 for BCA • RU – Remote Unit for MC • SLV – Slave for MOR

Page 185: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 185

Verification: If you have included the NE subunits, all includable NE subunits should be on the “Map Window” as well, placed aside the optical master. The optical master should have the summery alarm of each NE subunit APART from those included on the “Map Window”. If the summary alarm state changes, the icon should change to the new state as well.

If you exclude the NE subunits from the “Map Window”, the icon should have the summary alarm of ALL subunits.

You should not be able to drag and drop NE subunits of an optical system out of the NE Tree into the map, independent whether or not the optical master is on the map.

6.14.8 Selecting an NE

How to: Select an NE on the Map by clicking on it once. If more than one NE was selected accidentally, a popup window will appear to specify the selection.

Verification: The selected NE should now be highlighted and its icon should change to an icon identifying the NE type. Verify that the selected NE is in the NE Tree. If more than one NE was selected accidentally, a popup window will appear to specify the selection. The selected NE should then be highlighted.

6.14.9 Moving an NE on the Map

How to: Select an NE on the map. Then drag it to the desired location.

Verification: Provided that the mouse cursor was moved far enough, the icon should now appear at the place where it was dragged.

6.14.10 Removing NEs from the Map

6.14.10.1 RF Units

How to: Right-click a selected RF unit in the vector map and select “Delete” in the context menu.

Verification: The RF unit should vanish from the vector map.

6.14.10.2 Optical Systems

How to: Right-click a selected master icon of an optical system and select “Delete” in the context menu.

Verification: The optical master and all its subunits should vanish from the vector map. This should work with every NE on the map.

6.14.11 NE Subunit Management

6.14.11.1 Excluding NE Subunits from an Optical System

How to: Select the icon of an optical master that has NE subunits on the map, right-click on it, and select “Remove Subunits”.

Verification: All of its subunits should disappear from the map. The icon of the optical master should now show the summary severity color of all its subunits.

Page 186: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 186 M0125ANA.DOC

6.14.11.2 Including NE Subunits to an Optical System

How to: Select the icon of an optical master that has no NE subunits on the map, right-click on it, and select “Include Subunits”.

Verification: All of the NE subunits should appear in the map. The icon of the optical master should now show the summary severity color of all its subunits, apart from the recently placed subunits.

6.14.12 View

This sub-menu of the tool Map offers the following views:

Empty: Map appears in grey. Only the major cities are displayed. Road: Map appears in yellow. All major streets as well as all special locations, e. g. fairs, ports, parks, lakes, rivers, and airports, are shown. Terrain: Map appears in green. All major geographical characteristics are displayed. Road and Data: Similar to “Road”. Political: Map appears with the same content as in “Road”, but the background color differs between the political borders. Flash Alarms: NEs with active alarms will be indicated by a flashing circle-mark.

6.15 TOOL WATCHDOG

Please observe that access to this tool can be configured in the Account Manager rights as explained in chapter 5.4.2.

In the A.I.M.O.S. Visualization select Tools / WatchDog.

With this tool all running applications are displayed. If necessary, applications can be paused and started again.

For further information please also refer to chapter 7.5 WatchDog.

6.16 TOOL PERFORMANCE MANAGER (OPTION)

This tool mainly serves for creating comparative charts of alarms and performance data, which can be stored, exported, or saved as image files.

Access to this tool can be configured in the Account Manager rights (see chapter 5.4.2).

With the Performance Manager tool alone, only charts from alarm data can be created. In order to be able to create charts from performance data, as well, or for generating charts at certain intervals and sending them out via mail, the tool Scheduler (see chapter 6.10) is also required.

Page 187: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 187

Before the performance data can be used by the Performance Manager, they have to be retrieved from the respective NEs as follows: In order to get the performance data of an NE - i.e. csv file on HD (Node X only) and data in database (Node X & ION) - use the Scheduler action Read Performance Data explained in chapter 6.10.3.4. Using the action Create Performance Data Chart (see 6.10.3.5) of the Scheduler it is possible to generate charts (which must be pre-defined in the Performance Manager) at certain intervals and to send them out via mail at specified addresses. Both the intervals and mail addresses can be customized in the Scheduler action. In the A.I.M.O.S. Visualization select Tools / Performance Manager.

The name of the chart currently selected is displayed here.

The chart selected will be displayed in this area when the evaluation is finished.

Use these fields to specify the chart settings (for details see section 6.16.2).

The settings of the chart currently selected are displayed.

6.16.1 Menus

Page 188: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 188 M0125ANA.DOC

6.16.1.1 Performance

Apart from the common items Undo, Refresh, and Close this menu also provides the possibility to export alarm data as excel file (Export Alarm Data).

Confirm chart settings with Apply (or use the Apply button). For details see 6.16.2.

6.16.1.2 Chart

New Chart: All settings made are deleted use to define a new chart from scratch.

Save Chart Configuration / Save as New Chart Configuration: Use to save a chart configuration for later use or to make it available for the Scheduler action Create Performance Data Chart (see chapter 6.10.3.5).

Use Save Chart Configuration to save it under the given name (no name will be requested) or Save as New Chart Configuration to save it under a new name (the old name will, however, be suggested). When a chart is saved for the first time the Chart Title (see next section) is suggested as its name.

Loading a configuration again may take some time since the evaluation starts anew.

Load: Use to load a pre-defined chart configuration from the list provided. This list contains a series of pre-defined factory-set configurations as well as individually set (see 6.16.2) and saved (see next menu item) personal configurations. The factory-set configurations serve to generate charts for the most useful evaluations since creating a chart configuration from scratch is a complex matter.

Rename: Use to change the name of a chart already saved.

Delete: Use to delete configurations that were already saved.

Save as Image File: Select a path to save the current chart series as image file (emf, etc.). This way of storage is recommended if the main purpose is to be able to quickly view a chart at a later time.

Print Chart / Print Chart with Aspect Ratio: Use to print a chart.

6.16.2 Settings

Notes:

When setting the chart parameters, please keep in mind that not all of the various combinations make sense. Due to the great variety of setting options it is not possible to give examples for all. In view of this complexity of the Performance Manager, experience in working with charts is indispensible for this tool.

In addition, no more than 16 different types of measurement values should be integrated in one chart, since the number of colors for the distinction of the values is restricted.

The pre-defined configurations that can be loaded via the Chart menu (see 6.16.1.2) may be used as reference and modified in order to meet individual requirements. If you plan to keep a factory-set configuration for later use, take care not to overwrite it. To keep both configurations, save the modified version under a new name.

Page 189: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 189

The following settings can be made to customize a chart:

Depending on your choices in the individual fields the further options will be adapted accordingly. Since the parameters vary, the screen shots in the following are always of an exemplary nature. This explanation is intended to provide an overview of the most important setting options. At the end of this chapter an exemplary chart is added to illustrate the various settings. A field that is marked red (e. g. beside Series Type or Data Source in the example to the left) indicates that a problem or warning message is available for this selection. Move the cursor over the respective option to display the message as illustrated in the following examples.

. . . .

The combination of settings is not possible and, thus, not accepted.

This example shows a warning / recommendation since Series Type ‘Bar’ can lead to undesirable results when combined with Data Source ‘Exact Time’:

Per each measured value/result a single bar will be generated where the individual bars all have the same distance and do not represent the time line. Thus, Series Type ‘Lines’ might be a more suitable choice, here, because it positions the data points forming the chart line in chronological order, which is usually a main reason for choosing ‘Exact Time’. Therefore, this warning / recommendation is provided, here. However, the choice is not rejected for it is possible that in rare cases the chronological order might be irrelevant.

Page 190: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 190 M0125ANA.DOC

Chart Scope:

Choose the interval for which the evaluation should be made. Depending on the choice made for Time Period further information, such as First Day and Amount of Days (max. 365) or Last Day for a Fix Period of Time, may be required.

NE Filter:

Opens the NE Filter Builder to customize a filter (see chapter 6.4.3.2) for the evaluation.

Alarm Filter:

Displays the list of alarm profiles that were created via Tools Profiles Alarm Profiles (see chapter 6.17 and 6.17.4). By choosing a certain profile the alarms to be used for the chart can be specified. Chart Layout:

Chart Title: Specify a title, which will be displayed on top of the chart.

Series Layout: Select the layout for the chart, e. g. ‘3D’.

Color Scheme: Choose from a selection of available patterns.

Max. Points per Page:

Use to restrict the number of items on the X-Axis. The chart may thus be stretched over several pages. Use the arrow buttons below the chart to page through the chart:

The default setting 0 means there is no restriction, and the chart will be made to fit on one page.

Series Count:

Enter the number of Chart Series to be shown in one chart. Up to four are possible and if more than 1 is chosen, the category Chart Series will be extended into Chart Series 1 and (depending on the setting) Chart Series 2, Chart Series 3, and Chart Series 4). Bottom Axis / Top Axis:

At the bottom and / or top of the chart an X-axis can be defined and to each Chart Series its individual axis can be assigned. The setting options for Bottom and Top Axis are the same.

Data Source: Select the Data Source to be used for the axis (NE, Alarm Type, or Date Time). If none is selected, the according axis will not be provided.

Sort Order:

‘Values’ sorts the chart (X-axis = Bottom Axis and/or Top Axis) according to the values of the Y-Axis (ascending or descending).

‘Labels’ sorts the order on the X-Axis either alphabetically or chronologically (depending on the Data Source of the X-Axis: types or time), ascending or descending.

Page 191: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 191

Depending on the ‘Data Source‘ selected, specify ‘Type’ or ‘Severities’:

For Data Source ‘Network Element’ select the ‘Type’ for the classification (e. g. Folder, NE Type, etc.).

For Data Source ‘Alarm Type’ select the ‘Severities’ to be used by setting the check-marks accordingly.

For Data Source ‘Date Time’ select the ‘Type’ (= interval to be used) for the classification (e. g. Hourly, Daily, etc.).

Left Axis / Right Axis:

Select the scale for the Y-Axes by choosing between a linear and a variety of logarithmic divisions. Different settings for the Left Axis and Right Axis are possible.

A logarithmic division is recommendable if the span of values is great, so that lower values can also be displayed in a distinct way (see also example at the end of the chapter). Chart Series (n): For each chart series select the Source Type, the Series Type and assign the Horizontal Axis (Bottom or Top) and Vertical Axis (Left or Right). Please also have a look at the example at the end of this chapter to get a better understanding of the various setting possibilities.

Source Type:

Select the source for each series (Alarm Data* or Performance Data**; reset is possible by selecting the empty field).

* Alarm Data refers to all alarms in A.I.M.O.S. no matter if visible in Supervision or Alarm History. ** Performance Data refers to data downloaded by A.I.M.O.S. via the tool Scheduler (see chapter

6.10.3.5.); currently this source is only supported for Node C, G, or M except two-box (DCM1 units) with a SW version <1.5.

Series Type: Select the type for each series (Line, Bar, or Pie).

Horizontal Axis: Select to which horizontal axis (Bottom or Top) this chart series shall be assigned.

Vertical Axis: Select to which vertical axis (Left or Right) this chart series shall be assigned.

Page 192: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 192 M0125ANA.DOC

For each Chart Series the Calculation (‘Y-Axis’) and Grouping (‘Z-Axis’) can be individually defined. Making entries for the Z-Axis is not obligatory and for a chart with more than one Chart Series this further distinction is not recommended since the large number of data can easily result in an unclear or even confusing chart. Depending on the selection made for Source Type, the Data Source options for the Y- and Z-Axis will vary. For Alarm Data the options are as follows:

Calculation (‘Y-Axis’):

Select the Data Source to be used for the Y-Axis (i.e. Alarm Raise Count, Active Alarm Count, Availability, or Alarm Duration).

o Alarm Raise Count: Amount of all alarms raised, irrespective of whether alarms were subsequently cleared or recognized.

o Active Alarm Count: Amount of alarms (that were not cleared) for a specific time.

o Availability: The availability gives an indication of the success ratio of a Network Element. When this option is chosen as data source, a further distinction (Type) is provided to choose between the following:

- ‘Suspended’ is the ratio of suspended* periods to the chart’s scope.

- ‘Active’ is the ratio of not suspended* periods to the chart’s scope.

- ‘Success’ is the ratio of periods without any alarm to the chart’s scope less suspended* times.

- ‘Failure’ is the ratio of periods with active alarms to the chart’s scope less suspended* times * Suspended times (periods) are currently only supported for the Node AM. Network Elements are suspended when they are ‘Off Duty’ (NE is powered on but 'out of operation area', which means that no alarms are generated) or ‘Shut Down’ (i.e. 'out of service').

o Alarm Duration: Indicates the overall alarm duration of all alarms. If an alarm is still active at the end of the chart’s scope, the alarm is treated as if it was cleared at the end of the chart’s scope.

For all types of data source you can enter minimum or maximum values (or a combination of both) to be used for the evaluation. If you only want to see the “top scores” in the set period, enter the according figure in the field Top (e. g. Top 5). The example on the next page illustrates such a setting.

Page 193: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 193

Example: The X-Axis shows various alarm times and the Y-Axis the sum of alarms for each point in time. If Top 5 is chosen in this case, the chart will be reduced to those alarm times with the most, second most etc. up to fifth most alarms, as shown in the following illustration:

After selecting Top 5 the chart will look as follows:

Page 194: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 194 M0125ANA.DOC

Grouping (‘Z-Axis’):

Select the Data Source to be used for grouping (Network Element, Alarm Type, or Date Time).

Depending on the Data Source selection, specify ‘Type’ or ‘Severities’ (the available choices are the same as for the X-Axis see description Bottom Axis / Top Axis):

A color code will be used in the chart to visualize the individual groups. If Performance Data is selected as Source Type, the following options vary from the explanation above:

As Data Source in the Calculation (‘Y-Axis’) the options NE Data and Channel Data are provided. The available settings are as follows (Channel is only provided if Channel Data is selected):

Measurement shows the type of value that was selected in the Node (in this example i.e. DL Rx Power) and transferred to A.I.M.O.S. via the Scheduler.

Channel provides a context-sensitive list depending on the available data.

Aggregation: If more measurement values are available for the same measured variable on the X-Axis*, use this field to decide which value should be represented in the chart (e. g. minimum or maximum value or an average of all). * This can be the case when ‘Bottom Axis’ -> ‘Type’ -> ‘Hourly’ was selected but 4 measurements per hour are made; thus 4 values are available.

- As Data Source in the Grouping (‘Z-Axis’) only the option Network Element is provided.

In all other respects the explanation for the Source Type Alarm Data is valid for the Performance Data, as well.

Page 195: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 195

When all settings are made, click the Apply button to generate the according chart series and continue with the further series, if required.

Example:

The exemplary chart on the next page was generated with the following settings:

The Time Period from 15th to 21st of September 2009 was used for the evaluation.

The number of Network Elements of the Bottom Axis is restricted to 40. Therefore, the chart extends over the required number of pages.

Two Chart Series are defined.

Since no Chart Series is assigned to the Top Axis, it is not displayed in the chart.

The left axis is divided logarithmically the distance from 0 to 10 and from 10 to 100 is the same and values below 10 can thus also be clearly distinguished.

Not assigned in the exemplary chart.

The (orange) bars in the chart represent the rate the individual NEs (Each Single NE was chosen as Type for the Bottom Axis) were operating (= not Off Duty) but in alarm state (Availability Failure).

Not defined.

The (red) lines in the chart show the Alarm Raise Count of the individual NEs (Each Single NE was chosen as Type for the Bottom Axis) up to a maximum value of 200.

Not defined.

Page 196: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 196 M0125ANA.DOC

6.17 TOOL PROFILES

In the A.I.M.O.S. Visualization select Tools / Profiles.

This tool provides shortcuts to the profiles that can also be set via the Connectivity Manager, Account Manager or Preferences Editor depending on the profile type. Once a profile has been created, it can be assigned to NEs via the according tab in the Functions bar (see chapter 6.8).

Only when the tool Performance Manager (see chapter 6.16) is licensed, the ‘Alarm Profiles’ are available. This profile serves to assign individual names to certain alarms. The alarm groups specified here can be used by the Performance Manager. For more details see chapter 6.17.4.

Page 197: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 197

6.17.1 Connectivity Manager Profiles

Assign these profiles to an NE via the Configuration / Connectivity tab of the functions bar (see chapter 6.9). Access to these profiles can be configured in the Account Manager (chapter 5.4.2).

For details about the SMC Service Center Profiles see chapter 5.3.3.4.

For details about the RAS-in Profiles see chapter 5.3.3.1.

For details about the Network Element Circuit Switched Profiles see chapter 5.3.3.2.

For details about the Network Element Packet Switched Profiles see chapter 5.3.3.3.

For details about the Network Element Web Login Profiles see chapter 5.3.3.5.

6.17.2 NE Owner Profile of Account Manager Assign the NE Owner profile to an NE via the Configuration / General tab of the functions bar (see chapter 6.8.2). Access to this profile can be configured in the Account Manager (chapter 5.4.2).

For details about the NE Owner Profiles see chapter 5.4.5.

Page 198: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 198 M0125ANA.DOC

6.17.3 Configuration Groups of Preferences Editor

Assign the NE Configuration Group profile to an NE via the Identification field in the Configuration / General tab of the functions bar (see chapter 6.8.2).

Long Name: This name will be displayed in the Identification field of the Functions bar under the Configuration / General tab (see chapter 6.8.2). Short Name: This name will be displayed in the field “...in Configuration Group” of the NE Filter Builder (see chapter 6.4.3.2) for quick identification when choosing the filter settings. Configuration File: Choose the correct file for the according NE from the list of available files.

This profile is also available via the Preferences Editor (see chapter 5.2). Access can be configured in the

Page 199: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 199

Account Manager Rights ('Configuration'; see 5.4.2).

6.17.4 Alarm Profiles

Alarm Profiles provides two menus (Alarm Profiles and View) to create, export, edit, delete and view the alarm profiles that can be used by the Performance Manager (chapter 6.16) for the creation of alarm charts. The Alarm Profiles window displays a table of all available alarms.

Profiles can be created via Alarm Profiles – Profile Management – Create new Profile and entering a name.

Each profile will be added as a new table column:

Page 200: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 200 M0125ANA.DOC

Alarms that should belong to a profile must be tagged in the respective column. To set the check-marks it is also possible to select/highlight the desired alarms and use the ‘Alarm Profiles’ menu item ‘Add selected Alarms to Profile’. To add all alarms to a profile they can be quickly selected using the menu item ‘Select All’ Please observe that access to this action can be configured in the Account Manager (chapter 5.4.2).

To delete alarms from a profile click the according check-marks or highlight the according alarms and use the ‘Alarm Profiles’ menu item ‘Delete selected Alarms from Profile’.

To display the alarms of all profiles or only of an individual one, use the All Profiles button to select all or an individual profile. The displayed table and button will change accordingly:

This selection is also possible via the menu item ‘Profile Filter’ of the View menu.

Please observe that if an alarm line is clicked in this view, the according alarm will be removed from this profile, as if it was unchecked.

Furthermore, the View menu can be used to save or load individual grid layouts for the table and provides a Filter Builder to customize it further. For further details on grid layouts and filter builder please refer to chapters 6.4.1.3 and 6.4.2.

Use the Excel Export button to save the Alarm Profile settings currently displayed as Excel file.

Page 201: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 201

6.17.5 Export Profiles

Access to the ‘Export Profiles’ must be configured in the Account manager (‘Reporting’ right). For details see chapter 5.4.2.

Available for an export mainly are queries ("views") provided in the Network Element List (chapter 6.11). Three pre-configured profiles are available right away:

With the Scheduler action "Create Export" (see chapter 6.10.3.8) the Export Profiles can be configured further and the export can be scheduled as required. Creating an Excel or xml file is possible.

In the ‘Export Profiles’ select which data are to be exported and configure the available parameters as follows: Profile Name: Specify a unique name for the export. This name will also be available in the export configuration of the Scheduler. If an already existing name is entered, the entry will be marked red and the system will prompt you to change it. Export Name: Available data types (mainly views from the Network Element List, chapter 6.11) are listed (not configurable). Export Details: The data to be exported can be specified using the Edit button to open a checkbox list for an individual data selection:

Type: Select the View to be exported (see also Network Element List, chapter 6.11).

Fields to export: In this list the data to be exported can be individually specified by tagging / untagging the according checkbox. (The items available in the list depend on the Export Type.) You can also open the context-sensitive ’select action’ menu (see next page), which offers multiple choices for a quick selection.

Page 202: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 202 M0125ANA.DOC

select action: Opens a context-sensitive list of multiple actions (the choice depends on the NE type) by which several data can be selected for or removed from the export, e. g.:

The same list is available by a right mouse-click in the selection field. When a selection is made here, any individual selection made before will be overwritten, it is, however, possible to adjust the selection afterwards by tagging / untagging certain choices. By clicking the New button a new query can be defined as explained in the above and will be added at the end of the list.

6.17.6 External Tool Profiles

Access to the ‘External Tool Profiles’ must be configured in the Account manager (‘Reporting’ right). For details see chapter 5.4.2.

An External Tool Profile must be configured in order to be able to execute the ‘Run External Tool’ action of the Tool Scheduler (Option), chapter 6.10.3. This action serves to start external tools (e.g. exe or batch files) via A.I.M.O.S.

The following parameters must be set:

Name: Define a name for the profile.

Executable: Select the name of the external tool (= executable) which should be filed on the A.I.M.O.S. server under Bin\ExternalTools.

Arguments: Define the parameters for the external tool.

Working Directory: Specify the path of the working directory to be used.

Page 203: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

6 A.I.M.O.S. - Operations

Page 203

6.18 OMC3 ADAPTER

This service is started automatically and used by A.I.M.O.S. for OMC3 synchronization.

Status window of the OMC3 Adapter under Windows 2003:

To start the visualization of this service double-click on the OMC3 icon in the system tray.

Note: Please observe that the OMC3 Adapter is not visible in the "system tray" with Windows 2008 irrespective of the A.I.M.O.S. version.

6.19 SNMP GUI This program is used for the graphical supervision of the SNMP Agent service, which is used by A.I.M.O.S. for the synchronization of SNMP traps. For the configuration of the SNMP Agent please refer to chapter 5.1.4. Program and service are started automatically To start the visualization of this service

double-click on the SNMP icon (green circle) in the system tray (Win2003)

or

select Start Programs Andrew A.I.M.O.S. SNMP GUI (Win2008).

Page 204: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 204 M0125ANA.DOC

In the ‘Status’ tab the performance data of the SNMP Agent are displayed:

The ‘Diagnosis’ tab can be used to get more detailed information on the performance data in the ‘Status’ tab or for logging purposes. The tabs that are included in the ‘Diagnosis’ tab are selected in the ‘Settings’ tab:

Use the ‘Settings’ tab to select which data are made available in the ‘Diagnosis’ tab by tagging the according fields:

Page 205: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

7 A.I.M.O.S. Database Administration / Maintenance Tool

Page 205

7 A.I.M.O.S. DATABASE ADMINISTRATION / MAINTENANCE TOOL

Select StartProgramsAndrew A.I.M.O.S.

Server Maintenance. to start the A.I.M.O.S. Maintenance Tool.

Select the required function (all explained in the following chapters) in the navigation window. Available are Backup, Restore, Validate, Update, and WatchDog.

7.1 BACKUP

Use the backup functionality to make backups of the OMC3/A.I.M.O.S. database (automation is possible via the Automatic Backup feature; see chapter 5.9).

The path and filename of the backup have to be entered or selected.

The contents of the backup have to be selected: A.I.M.O.S. and/or OMC3.

It is recommended to make a backup of the OMC3/A.I.M.O.S. after major changes or before an update.

Start the selected backup(s) with the 'Start' button.

7.1.1 Backup to File

Select or enter the path to and the name of the backup file. Enter the complete name of the file with suffix “.aimosbackup”*, e. g. backup_3_8_04.aimosbackup. A number is automatically attached to the filename of the backup file (e. g. backup_3_8_04[0000].aimosbackup).

Please note: A backup includes all vital settings from the A.I.M.O.S. Server Configuration / Configuration Tool (see chapter 5.1). The Configuration Tool settings (see section 7.2.5) will be included automatically, thus, if settings in the A.I.M.O.S. Configuration Tool were changed, it is recommendable to make a new backup. Please observe that the Configuration Tool itself also provides a button to make a backup of most of its current settings (see chapter 5.1).

* Until A.I.M.O.S. version 2.9.0 the backup file was saved with suffix “.zip”.

Page 206: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 206 M0125ANA.DOC

7.1.2 Include A.I.M.O.S.

Check this checkbox to make a backup of the complete A.I.M.O.S. database.

7.1.3 Include OMC3

Check this checkbox to make a backup of the OMC3 database.

Note: Before the OMC3 backup can be started all open accesses of the OMC3 are stopped (and restarted after backup) by the WatchDog.

To use this feature an OMC 3.54 has to be installed.

7.1.4 Backup Finished

Successful backups will be displayed in the backup window.

7.2 RESTORE Use the Restore functionality of A.I.M.O.S. to restore former stages of the software. (Automation is possible via the Automatic Backup feature; see chapter 5.9. Notes:

Here, the list of backups is displayed (see chapter 7.2.4).

The restore can only be carried out if a backup of A.I.M.O.S. has been saved before.

Only a backup of the running version can be restored (see also chapter 7.2.6 Backup Version).

The WatchDog will close all necessary applications for the restore and will start these applications automatically after the restore.

Page 207: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

7 A.I.M.O.S. Database Administration / Maintenance Tool

Page 207

The backup file has to be selected. The version of the selected backup file is displayed.

Note: All changes since the date of the backup are lost.

Start the selected procedure(s) by clicking the 'Start' button.

7.2.1 Restore from File

Select or enter the path to and the name of the “.aimosbackup” file *. Registry entries, the A.I.M.O.S. database and the OMC3 database can be restored. Previous backup files are displayed in the list of backups.

Please note that before and after a restore it is always recommended to check all settings in the A.I.M.O.S. Configuration Tool. This is essential because unwanted registry settings could have been restored or windows settings may have significantly changed since the restored backup was created.

* Until A.I.M.O.S. version 2.9.0 the backup file was saved with suffix “.zip”.

7.2.2 Restore A.I.M.O.S.

Check this checkbox to include the A.I.M.O.S. database to the restore procedure.

7.2.3 Restore OMC3

Check this checkbox to include the OMC3 database to the restore procedure.

Note: Before the OMC3 restore can be started the WatchDog stops all open accesses of the OMC3 database and restarts them after the restore.

To use this feature an OMC 3.54 has to be installed.

7.2.4 The List of Backups

The files of all previous backups are displayed in this list. Select the file from the list and start the restore procedure.

7.2.5 Restore Configuration Tool Settings

This option serves to restore all settings of the Server Configuration Tool (see chapter 5.1 Server Configuration / Configuration Tool) at the time of the backup. If the check-mark is not set, only the settings of the pages "Licenses", "Security", "Logging", and the settings "Visu Gateway Port" (at "General" page) and "Length of Generated Community Name" (at "SNMP" page) will be restored. Set the check-mark to restore all other Configuration Tool settings, as well. Please observe that the Configuration Tool itself also provides a button to make a backup/restore of most of its current settings (see chapter 5.1).

Note: In a migration scenario from Windows 32 Bit to Windows 64 Bit, do NOT set the check-mark for the first Restore if the Table of Contents has changed (e.g: Windows 32 Bit: "C:\Program Files; Windows 64 Bit: "C:\Program Files (x86)").

Page 208: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 208 M0125ANA.DOC

7.2.6 Backup Version

When a file is selected, the A.I.M.O.S. version under which this file was created is displayed. If this version corresponds to the running A.I.M.O.S. version, it is written in green indicating that a restore is possible. If the file was created by a former version of A.I.M.O.S., restoring it is not possible and the writing is red.

7.2.7 Restore Finished

Successful Restore jobs will be displayed in the restore window:

7.3 VALIDATE

Validating a database means to check the consistency of the database and to repair errors, if necessary. It is recommended to validate the database of the OMC3/A.I.M.O.S. if errors occur within the program or if the operating system is ended abruptly, e. g. in case of a power failure.

Start the selected validation procedure(s) by clicking the 'Start' button.

Page 209: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

7 A.I.M.O.S. Database Administration / Maintenance Tool

Page 209

7.3.1 Include A.I.M.O.S.

Check this checkbox to include the A.I.M.O.S. database to the validation procedure.

7.3.2 Include OMC3

Check this checkbox to include the OMC3 database to the validation procedure. To use this feature an OMC 3.54 has to be installed.

7.3.3 Validation Finished

Successful validation procedures will be displayed in the validation window:

7.4 UPDATE

Use the update functionality to update the A.I.M.O.S. server (please also see chapter 4.3.1).

Page 210: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 210 M0125ANA.DOC

7.4.1 Update From File

Select or enter the path to and the file name of the update zip file. Start the update by clicking the 'Start' button.

(In case of updates from very old versions the following screen appears:

Confirm with 'Yes'. After the confirmation an automatic restart of the program is initiated. )

Please note: Depending on the speed of the A.I.M.O.S. server a red X may be displayed shortly to indicate the restart. It is not an indication of a program error.

Confirm with the OK button to finish the update.

Please note:

It is required to install a permanent license within two weeks otherwise usage of the A.I.M.O.S. visualization will no longer be permitted.

To install the License File for a permanent use of A.I.M.O.S., please refer to chapter 4.5 How to get A.I.M.O.S. licensed.

Page 211: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

7 A.I.M.O.S. Database Administration / Maintenance Tool

Page 211

7.4.2 Update Finished

Successful updates will be displayed in the update window:

7.5 WATCHDOG

Please also see chapter 6.15 Tool Watchdog.

The WatchDog displays all running A.I.M.O.S. applications. If necessary, e.g. for a validation of a database, the WatchDog stops and automatically re-starts applications accessing the database(s).

With the context menu of the right-mouse click on the top line applications can be:

paused (stopped with the option to re-start the application)

started, after they have been paused

stopped (shutdown the application with the possibility for the application to save changes).

Also A.I.M.O.S. can be shut down.

Page 212: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 212 M0125ANA.DOC

With the context menu of the right-mouse click on a single application the application can be:

paused

started, after it has been paused

stopped

terminated (shutdown the application without the possibility for the application to save changes.

When an application – running on a computer that is not the server computer – is stopped (e. g. a visualization running on a client), a message can be sent to inform the user about the stopping of the application and a timer can be set.

Page 213: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

8 A.I.M.O.S. Test Tools

Page 213

8 A.I.M.O.S. TEST TOOLS

When the option ‘Test Tools’ is selected in the Custom Setup (see chapter 4.2), the hardware simulation tools AgentSim, ComasTest, MIB, and TrapMonitor, which can be used for system analysis, will be installed.

They can be started via

StartPrograms Andrew A.I.M.O.S.:

Note: Please observe that these tools should only be used by Andrew technicians.

8.1 AGENT SIM

This tool serves to simulate different NE types, except SMS-connected NEs, OMC3 systems, and optical network systems (ION).

Please observe that at the first start of "AgentSim" under Windows 2008 with active Windows Firewall the following alert is displayed:

Set the check-mark for ‘Private networks, such …’ as shown in the figure above and confirm by clicking "Allow Access". If this alert is quit with "Cancel", the program will not function properly and can not be used for test purposes. At the next program start the alert is no longer displayed to change this. So please make sure to follow this procedure.

Page 214: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 214 M0125ANA.DOC

- To simulate an NE via AgentSim, start the program and select the NE type you would like to simulate from the list provided:

Do not close the window for the time of the session; just minimize it.

- Then, the NE can be created as explained in chapter 6.5. Please verify that the IP port is set to 165 (default setting):

When 0 is entered four times as IP-Address in the new NE dialogue in the Visualization, the correct address (corresponding to IP address of the OMC server see chapter 5.1.2) and port will be set automatically.

Note: For common application it is not necessary to adjust the configuration of the AgentSim. If adjustments are required for special purposes, open the file AgentSim.ini under ~\Andrew\AIMOS\Bin and make the required setting before starting the AgentSim.

* These two settings must correspond to the settings in the A.I.M.O.S. server and in the Server Configuration / Configuration Tool (see chapter 5.1.2: ‘OmcIp’ corresponds to ‘IP Address of the OMC Server’ and ‘OmcPort’ corresponds to ‘SNMP Trap Port of the OMC Server’).

- Now, the AgentSim.exe window can be used to simulate certain events for the NE, e. g. raising test alarms, etc.:

These two settings must be equal.

*

Page 215: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

8 A.I.M.O.S. Test Tools

Page 215

8.2 COMAS TEST

This tool serves to simulate ION-M and OMC3 systems (devices connected via Comas protocol). Please observe that at a first start under Windows 2008 with active Windows Firewall an alert similar to the one for the AgentSim is displayed. Answer the alert as explained in chapter 8.1.

Possible selections are: ’MC’ for an ION

system ‘OMC3’ for an OMC3

system

Corresponding to IP-Address / Port of New ION-M window (see below).

- To simulate such systems, start the program and create the required NEs as explained in chapter 6.5. Please verify that the IP Port is set to 7420. When 0 is entered four times as IP-Address during the NE creation in the Visualization, the correct IP Address (corresponding to IP address of the OMC server see chapter 6.1.2) and Port will be set automatically.

Corresponding to Partner IP / Port of Comas window (see above).

- After clicking the Open Session button in the Comas-Test window, the tool can be used to simulate certain events for the system, e. g. raising test alarms, etc.:

Do not close the Comas-Test window for the time of the session; just minimize it.

Page 216: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 216 M0125ANA.DOC

8.3 MIB

This tool is a MIB viewer; see exemplary figures below:

Select a MIB and Open it to view its contents:

8.4 TRAP MONITOR

This tool is used to receive test traps.

The Trap Port corresponds to the Default Port for outgoing SNMP Traps of the Server Configuration / Configuration Tool (see chapter 5.1.4.2 for details).

corresponds to the A.I.M.O.S. server

The user who is allowed to receive the test traps must be configured in the Account Manager (see chapter 5.4).

Page 217: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

9 Logging

Page 217

9 LOGGING

9.1 LOG FILE DOCUMENTATION

A.I.M.O.S. provides a variety of different log files depending on the purpose. All log files are stored at the A.I.M.O.S. Server.

9.1.1 Log File Overview

Installation and Uninstalling

Database Server Operations

Connection to OMC3

Database Maintenance Operations

Automatic Database Backup

Automatic Database Restore

Services Supervision

Connection to Network Elements, Database and Visualization

Automatic ODBC Export

Server Update

SNMP Operations

9.1.2 Log File Contents

9.1.2.1 Installation and Uninstalling

Content abstract: It contains all information which is collected during A.I.M.O.S. installation and uninstalling procedures.

Location: “~\Andrew\AIMOS\Bin\Log”

Name: “ProcessingServices.log”

Trigger: “ProcessingServices.jse” and “UninstallServices.jse”

Size: > 5 KB – The exact size depends on how many installation and uninstalling procedures were performed.

Size required per day (role of thumb): none

Configuration: not required

Rotation: none

Format: [Date] [Time] [Event]

Example: 2010-10-08 10:14:00.300; Guardian starting: "[Firebird Installation Directory]\Firebird_2_5\bin\fbserver.exe"

Note: This log file contains all operations which are performed in addition to the InstallShield™ installation and uninstalling procedures.

Page 218: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 218 M0125ANA.DOC

9.1.2.2 Database Server Operations

Content abstract: It contains all information which is collected during all Firebird Database Server operations.

Location: “~\Andrew\AIMOS\Firebird”

Name: “firebird.log”

Trigger: “FirebirdServerServerDefaultInstance” & “FirebirdGuardianDefaultInstance”

Size: > 4 KB - The exact size depends on how many database procedures were performed.

Size required per day (role of thumb): approx. 1 KB per day

Configuration: not required

Rotation: none

Format: [Database Server Name] [Date & Time] [Event] [Additional Event Information]

Example: AIMOS_TEST (Server) Fri Oct 08 10:22:09 2010 Server: setting SWEEP_QUANTUM to 250, USER_QUANTUM to 1000, SWEEP_YIELD_TIME to 1 ms, and MAX_THREADS to 1 SQL_COMPILER_RECURSION to 2000

Note: The contents or format of this log file is determined by Borland™.

9.1.2.3 Connection to OMC3

Content abstract: It contains all information which is collected during OMC3 Adapter operations.

Location: “~\Andrew\AIMOS\Bin”

Name: “AIMOS_OMC3_Adapter.Dmp”

Trigger: “A.I.M.O.S. OMC3 Adapter”

Size: > 4 KB - The exact size depends on how many OMC3 operations were performed.

Size required per day (role of thumb): approx. 4 KB per day

Configuration: not required

Rotation: none

Format: [Date] [Time] [Event]

Example: 08.10.2010 10.14.13.253 Application Starting ...

Note: This log file is only available if a connection via OMC3 Adapter was established or, respectively, if a supervision of old Andrew™ repeaters is intended.

Page 219: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

9 Logging

Page 219

9.1.2.4 Database Maintenance Operations

Content abstract: It contains all information which is collected by all database maintenance operations.

Location: “~\Andrew\AIMOS\Bin\Log”

Name: “AIMOS_Maintenance.log”

Trigger: “A.I.M.O.S. Maintenance Tool”

Size: > max. 3 MB - The exact size depends on how many database maintenance operations were performed.

Size required per day (role of thumb): none

Configuration: not required

Rotation: If the limit of 3 MB is reached, the first 1.5 MB will be deleted.

Format: [Date] [Time] [Event ID] [Source ID] [Event]

Example: 09.10.2010 13.04.20.495 [ 2621926] [ App. ] Starting checkpoint: Validate: Load database information

9.1.2.5 Automatic Database Backup

Content abstract: It contains all information which is collected by all automatic backup operations.

Location: “~\Andrew\AIMOS\Bin”

Name: “autobackup.log”

Trigger: “AIMOS_db_backup.js”

Size: > 1 KB - The exact size depends on how many backup operations were performed.

Size required per day (role of thumb): none

Configuration: not required

Rotation: configurable via “AIMOS_db_backup.js

Format: [Date] [Time] [Event]

Example: 9.10.2010 13:12:25.11: Starting automatic backup, version: 3.2

More Information: see User’s Manual for Automatic Backup Feature (M0125B6), chapter 5.1.

Note: This log file is only available if the “Automatic Backup Feature” is used or a redundant A.I.M.O.S. Server Configuration is intended, respectively,

Page 220: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 220 M0125ANA.DOC

9.1.2.6 Automatic Database Restore

Content abstract: It contains all information which is collected by all automatic restore operations.

Location: “~\Andrew\AIMOS\Bin”

Name: “autorestore.log”

Trigger: “AIMOS_db_restore.js”

Size: > 1 KB - The exact size depends on how many restore operations were performed.

Size required per day (role of thumb): none

Configuration: not required

Rotation: configurable via “AIMOS_db_restore.js”

Format: [Date] [Time] [Event]

Example: 9.10.2010 13:19:46.894: Restore Started, version=3.2

More Information: see User’s Manual for Automatic Backup Feature (M0125B6), chapter 5.2.

Note: This log file is only available if the “Automatic Backup Feature” is used respectively a redundant A.I.M.O.S. Server Configuration is intended.

9.1.2.7 Services Supervision

Content abstract: It contains all information which is collected by A.I.M.O.S. Watchdog Service.

Location: “~\Andrew\AIMOS\Bin\Log”

Name: “WatchdogAutomatedObject[ID].Log”

Trigger: “A.I.M.O.S. Watchdog Service”

Size: > 4 KB - The exact size depends on how A.I.M.O.S. is used.

Size required per day (role of thumb): approx. 4 KB per day

Configuration: not required

Rotation: Configurable in the Housekeeping tab of the Server Configuration / Configuration Tool.

Format: [Date] [Time] [ID] [Error Classification] [Event]

Example: 08.10.2010 14.35.53.146 [00000004A4]CRITICAL ERROR : TClientWinSocket | <Method: <Unknown Exception Source>> | Unhandled Exception Catched | Exception: Windows socket error: An operation was attempted on something that is not a socket (10038), on API 'closesocket' |

Page 221: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

9 Logging

Page 221

9.1.2.8 Connection to Network Elements, Database and Visualization

Content abstract: Contains all information collected by A.I.M.O.S. Connector Service and A.I.M.O.S. Visualization.

Location: “~\Andrew\AIMOS\Bin\Log”

Name: “AIMOS_Connector_Log_[Current_Year]_[Current_Month]_[Current_Day].Log”

Trigger: “A.I.M.O.S. Connector Service” and “AIMOS_Visu.exe”

Size: > 20 KB - The exact size depends on how A.I.M.O.S. is used and how logging is configured.

Size required per day (role of thumb): approx. 20 KB per day

Configuration: see chapter 6.13 Tool Log Manager

Rotation: Files are stored on a daily basis and compressed. The duration of their storage can be set in the Housekeeping tab of the Server Configuration / Configuration Tool.

Format: “[Timestamp]”,”[Message]”,”[Severity]”,”[Log Kind]”,”[Thread]”,“[Thread Name]”,”[Unit Nr]”,”[Unit SDN]”,”[Component Name]”,”[Modem No.]”, ”[Comm.Resource]”,”[Command]”,”[Direction]”,”[MCNC]”,”[User No.]”,”[User Name]”,”[Run No.]”,

Example: "2010/10/08 10:14:08.097","Initializing Communication Resources",Info,Program Condition,CCOORD,"Comm. Resource Coordinator",,"","",,"","",,,,"",

9.1.2.9 Automatic ODBC Export

Content abstract: Contains all information collected by A.I.M.O.S. AutoExport.

Location: “~\Andrew\AIMOS\Bin”

Name: “AIMOS_AutoExport.log”

Trigger: “AIMOS_AutoExport.jse”

Size: > 1 KB - The exact size depends on how A.I.M.O.S. AutoExport is used.

Size required per day (role of thumb): none

Configuration: not required

Rotation: none

Format: [Date]__[Time] [AIMOS_Version] [Event]

Example: 2010_10_09__13_37 V2.6.0.101 Information: Standard configuration was used. check_Config_file()

More Information: see ODBC Interface manual (M0125B5), chapters 4.5.7.3 & 4.5.7.4

Note: This log file is only available if the Tool “AIMOS_AutoExport” is installed&used or if a cyclic database export is intended, respectively.

Page 222: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 222 M0125ANA.DOC

9.1.2.10 Server Update

Content abstract: It contains all information which is collected during the application update of an A.I.M.O.S. Update.

Location: "~\Andrew\AIMOS"

Name: "Install.txt"

Trigger: "MSIEXEC.exe"

Size: > 10 KB - The exact size depends on how many database procedures were performed.

Size required per day (role of thumb): none

Configuration: not required

Rotation: none

Note: The contents or format of this log file is determined by Microsoft TM. More Information about the database update can be found in chapter 9.1.2.4 Database Maintenance Operations.

9.1.2.11 SNMP Operations

Content abstract: Contains all information collected by A.I.M.O.S. SNMP Agent

Location: "~\Andrew\AIMOS\Bin\Log"

Name: "AIMOS_SNMP_Agent[Current_Year]_[Current_Month]_[Current_Day].Log"

Trigger: "A.I.M.O.S. SNMP Agent"

Size: > 4KB - The exact size depends on how A.I.M.O.S. SNMP Agent is used.

Size required per day (role of thumb): none

Configuration: To activate logging please refer to chapter 6.19 SNMP GUI.

Rotation: Files are stored on a daily basis. The duration of their storage can be set in the Housekeeping tab of the Server Configuration / Configuration Tool.

Format: [Date] [Time] [Event]

Example: 11/26/2010 4:27:10 PM - ProcessConfigChanged11/26/2010 4:27:12 PM - ProcessConfigChanged11/26/2010 4:27:12 PM - ProcessCloseQueries11/26/2010 4:27:21 PM - ProcessCloseQueries

Page 223: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

10 Troubleshooting

Page 223

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

10.1 RAS CONNECTIONS

In case of failures with the dial-in procedure ensure to check the following items:

Verify that communication with the Modem is possible: In order to run this check, the ‘incoming connection’ must be deleted (basic remote access server) or the RRAS server must be stopped (advanced remote access server). They must be added again after this test. Open Control Panel (Start->Settings->Control Panel), double click on ‘Phone and Modem Options’. Select Modems Tab and select your modem. Click on Properties and select the ‘Diagnostics’ tab. Press ‘query modem’. Check the output to verify if communication to the modem is possible.

Verify that the Modem is logged in into the mobile network (only wireless modems) refer to the modem documentation to find out how to check this.

MC35/MC88: the blinking scheme of the green LED indicates whether the modem is logged in into the network. A regular blinking scheme indicates that the modem is not logged in. Short single periodical flashes indicate that the modem is logged in to GSM/Circuit switched. Short double periodical flashes indicate that the modem is logged in to GPRS. Possible reasons are -SIM card protected by a PIN -no antenna connected to the modem -no network coverage.

Wrong phone number configured at NE.

Ensure that the SIM card is allowed to make data calls. In many cases SIM cards have different phone numbers for voice and data calls.

Interoperability problems of wireline modems to wireless modems. It has been detected that some mobile networks do not allow modem connections between wireline and wireless modem.

Password not stored in the reversible encryption format. Ensure that the security policy allows storing the password of the dial-in user in a reversible encryption format (ref. chapter 13.1.1). After changing this option, the password of the dial-in user needs to be set again.

Dial-in user defined at the wrong location. Windows allows adding users on a local machine or within a domain. If A.I.M.O.S runs as on a standalone machine the dial-in user must be defined locally. If A.I.M.O.S runs on a machine that is part of a windows domain, the user can be defined locally or within the domain. If the user is defined locally, the format on the remote machine must be: <server name>\<user name> (ref. to chapter 13.1.2).

The Remote Desktop Connection (RDC) to A.I.M.O.S. stops when a connection to an NE is built up:

MS Windows always adds an outgoing RAS connection to the ‘routing table’ during connection setup. Especially in cases where NEs and client are in the same network address range (e.g. addresses of A.I.M.O.S., clients and NEs all start with 10.x.y.z ), the Windows OS chooses the better route through the NE as soon as the connection to the NE is established and the RDC drops.

Page 224: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.9

Page 224 M0125ANA.DOC

If a RAS connection to an NE is built up from A.I.M.O.S. server, check whether:

a) A ping goes through from RMC / client to A.I.M.O.S. and vice versa. If not, fixed routes have to be defined.

b) All required ports are open throughout the entire path. If ping works both ways but either alarming or web-interface do not work, the ports on the link have to be revisited.

10.2 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

If a question arises about A.I.M.O.S. or the equipment, first look in the A.I.M.O.S. documentation or consult online help. If the answer cannot be found, please do not hesitate to contact CommScope Solutions product support:

+49 90 99 69 333 Germany

[email protected]

When you call, you should have the appropriate product documentation at hand.

Please be prepared to give the following information: Version number of A.I.M.O.S. software. Type of server/modem hardware incl. network hardware and network structure. OS (operating system). Exact content of any messages that appeared. A description of how the error occurred. The repeater hard- and software information (if applicable).

To speed up the trouble analysis, prepare the following:

1. System Information tool

Start the System Information* in

Start menu

Confirm all screens with “OK”:

(this screen is only visible with Win7:)

* For Windows 7 / 2008 starting the "System Information" tool with the option "Run As Administrator..." is mandatory.

Page 225: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

10 Troubleshooting

Page 225

In the background, the following status screen is displayed during the process:

The final screen shows the location of the file containing the script created in this process:

Send this file to technical support.

2. Visu Logs

Sending the “Visu Log” files to technical support, as well, also serves to speed up the analysis.

The “Visu Log” files can be created using the “Excel Export” in the “Log” tab* (see chapter 6.8.5):

* Please observe that the ‘Log’ tab must first be activated via the ‘Preferences Editor’ – ‘Other Settings’ – ‘Show Visu Log’ (see chapter 5.2) since it is deactivated by default.

Page 226: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.9

Page 226 M0125ANA.DOC

3. Major SW Errors

From A.I.M.O.S. V2.8.0 onwards major SW errors (e.g. Access Violation, Stack Overflow, Out of Memory, etc.) will be communicated to the customer as follows:

In such a case a 'bug report' can be sent to our Technical Support ([email protected]), which will make it easier for us to locate and fix the problem. If the according computer is not capable of sending out e-mails, use the button "save bug report" to create a text file which can then be sent from another computer.

Note: If “Application seems to be frozen” is displayed as “exception message” (last line), and the “program up time” (in the middle of the window) shows a value of around 10 minutes, close the window by the button

.

You should then be able to continue without error. In that case contacting the Technical Support is not required.

Page 227: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

10 Troubleshooting

Page 227

10.3 LICENSE INSTALLATION

The following error messages might be prompted during the license installation:

'You are not allowed to install the following license:'

The A.I.M.O.S. user has not the right to install a license. Another A.I.M.O.S. user who is allowed to install a license (e.g. Admin) must

be used. 'The following license cannot be used for your organization:'

A license for another Organization has already been installed or a license for another Organization was installed and has been deleted (e.g. 244004). The MCNC of the license to be installed and the previous one do not match.

A new installation or a database restore (a backup prior to the initial license installation) is required.

'The following license is invalid:'

The license is not valid, i.e. it was probably changed / damaged. Please contact Technical Support. 'The following license is not valid for A.I.M.O.S. V2.x.x.x:'

The versions of the license and of A.I.M.O.S. do not match. A new license must be requested. 'The installation of the following license has failed:'

The database is probably damaged. Please generate a database backup and contact Technical Support.

Page 228: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.9

Page 228 M0125ANA.DOC

For your notes:

Page 229: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

11 Glossary

Page 229

11 GLOSSARY A.I.M.O.S. Andrew Integrated Management and Operating System Company Kind The kind of company is automatically added when a new organization is added. Company kind can be: 0 = Telecommunication company (Telco) or 2 = Provider. DCM1 Digital Channel Module of the 1st generation used in Node M/C two-box repeaters. The successive one-box models are equipped with the DCM2 module. ION Intelligent Optical Network; two systems are available: ION-B = Intelligent Optical Network - Britecell ION-M = Intelligent Optical Network - MMR (= successor of MMR) LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (= application protocol for reading and editing directories over an IP network). MANAGEMENT INTERFACE The Management Interface displays all information available for the selected system or NE. If settings or values can be changed, the possible changes are displayed in different colors. MCC Mobile Country Code. Unique identifier for Network Providers MCNC Mobile Country-Mobile Network Code / Organization Code. Consists of the MCC and the MNC and is used in A.I.M.O.S. as unique identifier for the Network Provider. MIB Management Information Base MMR MMR optical systems are the predecessor of the ION-M system. From A.I.M.O.S. Version 2.8 onwards the designation 'ION-M' replaces 'MMR' in the software. MNC Mobile Network Code: Unique national identifier for Network Providers MU OTRx Master Unit Optical Transceiver (equals SRMU): Optical transceiver in an ION-M system. This term is gradually replacing the former designation SRMU.

Page 230: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.9

Page 230 M0125ANA.DOC

NE Network Element NE3S Nokia Enhanced SNMP Solution Suite NMS Network Management System RDN Relative Distinguished Name: Unique identifier for a component in the subsystem the component is a member of. SASL Acronym for Simple Authentication and Security Layer. SASL is a method for adding authentication support to connection-based protocols. SASL takes effect when a protocol initiates a command for identifying and authenticating a user to a server. SASL also includes an option for negotiating protection of subsequent protocol interactions. With this option in effect, SASL places a security layer between the protocol and the connection. SDN System Distinguished Name: Unique identifier for a repeater system, consisting of several RDSs. SMPP Short Message Peer-to-Peer protocol: The SMPP protocol is a telecommunications industry protocol for exchanging SMS messages. The SMPP protocol version supported by A.I.M.O.S. is V3.4. SMSC Short Message Service Centre: To use a SMPP protocol a SMSC must be reachable from the A.I.M.O.S. server over an IP connection, and the SMSC must provide a SMPP account that supports both sending and receiving short messages over a fix phone number. SRMU Subrack Master Unit (equals MU OTRx): Optical transceiver in an ION-M system. This designation is gradually replaced by the new term MU OTRx. UTC Coordinated Universal Time, the official measure of time in the world, which is independent from the time zones. Such a measure is calculated as a statistical average of several worldwide atomic clocks and it's periodically corrected by adding or subtracting the "Leap Second" to keep the difference between UTC and Earth rotation time below 0.9 seconds. In practice UTC corresponds to the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT), the mean solar time of the zero meridian crossing Greenwich (Great Britain).

Page 231: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

12 Appendix A – Modem Installation and Configuration

Page 231

12 APPENDIX A – MODEM INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION

This chapter describes the procedure for the modem installation. This procedure has to be done for each modem.

Depending on the operating system the configuration menu is called via the following menu:

Start -> Settings -> Control Panel -> Phone and Modem Options or

Start -> Control Panel -> Phone and Modem Options

The following figures show how to configure the modem.

This picture shows how to set the location information. These parameters do not have any relevance for the dial-in/dial-out configuration, but Windows requires setting them.

Modem configuration, location information

After the entered data are confirmed with the OK button, a new window will appear.

Modem configuration, Dialing Rules

Page 232: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.9

Page 232 M0125ANA.DOC

Selecting the ‘modems’ tab shows the installed modems.

Click on the ‘Add’ button in order to add a modem.

Modem configuration, Modems

The following window will appear.

Flag the option ‘Don’t detect my modem; I will select from a list’. Then press Next

Modem configuration, install new modem

Select the correct manufacturer and model of your modem.

Modem configuration, install new modem, select modem type

Page 233: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

12 Appendix A – Modem Installation and Configuration

Page 233

Select the COM port that is used to connect the modem.

Modem configuration, install new modem, select COM port

Click on ‘Finish’ to complete your modem configuration.

Modem configuration, install new modem, finish

A new window appears.

Click the ‘Properties’ button.

Modem configuration, Modems

Page 234: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.9

Page 234 M0125ANA.DOC

Click the ‘Diagnostics’ tab and then ‘Query Modem’ button. If the communication with the modem is possible, the window will change.

Modem configuration, Diagnostics (1) Modem configuration, Diagnostics (2)

In the ’Advanced’ Tab select the ‘Change Default Preferences ...’ button. Ensure that ‘Flow Control’ = Hardware is selected.

Modem configuration, Advanced Change Default Preferences

Click ’OK’ twice to finish the modem configuration.

Page 235: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

13 Appendix B – Dial-In Connectivity 13.1 Dial-In Server Configuration

Page 235

13 APPENDIX B – DIAL-IN CONNECTIVITY The following chapters contain the descriptions for setting up a remote access server. The screenshots displayed may be slightly different depending on the operating system language settings and exact version of the operating system.

13.1 DIAL-IN SERVER CONFIGURATION

Please observe that the setup described (screen shots are taken from a Win2003 server) is the recommended setup, but not mandatory. Since the procedure for Win2008 is similar this description can be used as well, but please observe that some screens may look slightly different.

Node X ION-M (MMR) Britecell /ION-B The following dial-in authentication method is used: MD5-CHAP

13.1.1 Security Policy

The user’s password needs to be stored in a way that allows windows to decrypt the password. This is a prerequisite for the MD5-CHAP authentication algorithm to work successfully.

The procedure for the setting of the Security policy depends on the fact whether the A.I.M.O.S computer is a standalone machine or part of windows domain.

13.1.1.1 Local Security Policy

This chapter is applicable only for an A.I.M.O.S machine that is not part of a windows domain.

The ‘Local security Policy’ management console can be opened via:

Start Administrative Tools Local Security Policy

Ensure that the effective setting of the option ‘Store password using reversible encryption for all users in the domain’ is set to ‘enabled’. After changing the value, do a right-mouse click on ‘security settings’ in the left window and select the option ‘reload’ in order to retrieve the current effective setting of the value.

Local Security Policy:

Note: If the dial-in user already exists before changing the Local Security Policy, the password has to be set again in order to ensure that the password is stored in the correct mode.

Page 236: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 236 M0125ANA.DOC

13.1.1.2 Domain Security Policy

This chapter is applicable only for an A.I.M.O.S machine that is part of a windows domain. In this case the domain settings override the local settings.

Go to “administrative tools”/”active directory users and computers”. Double-click on the dial-in user (e.g. altegr) and select account:

Enable "store password using reversible encryption" and apply: Note: If the dial-in user already exists before changing the Domain Security Policy, the password has to be set again in order to ensure that the password is stored in the correct mode.

Page 237: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

13 Appendix B – Dial-In Connectivity 13.1 Dial-In Server Configuration

Page 237

Select again dial-in user (altegr) Make a right click on it and select “Set password...”

Set the password again:

Default Domain Security Settings

Note: The domain security policy is not affected by these settings; "Store passwords using reversible encryption" is still disabled for all other users.

Default Domain Controller Security Settings

Page 238: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 238 M0125ANA.DOC

13.1.2 User Account Data

The User Account can be added as local user on the A.I.M.O.S. machine or as a domain user on the windows domain server. This is described in the following chapters.

13.1.2.1 Adding a Local Dial-in User

In case of an A.I.M.O.S system that is not part of a windows domain, the dial-in user must be added as a local account. If the A.I.M.O.S system is part of a windows domain, the dial-in user can be added locally as described in this chapter or as a domain user (ref. to next chapter 13.1.2.2).

The user configuration can be opened as follows: Right click on ‘My Computer Manage’.

The following window will appear.

Computer Management, Users

In the left part of the window select ‘Computer Management -> System Tools -> Local Users and Groups -> Users. In the main window, do a ‘right-mouse click’ and select the option ‘New User’. The window “New User” appears. Fill in as follows:

The default username/ password is ‘altegr/altegr’. Please ensure that all remote elements (ION/MMR, Node X, Britecell) are configured to use this login. In this configuration the user on the remote device can be set to either ‘altegr’ or ‘<server name>\altegr’. Both options work.

Uncheck the option ‘User must change password at next logon’.

Note: Verify if ‘User cannot change password‘ needs to be set. Set the check-mark for ‘Password never expires’.

Click the button Create in order to create the user and press the Close button.

Computer Management, New User

Page 239: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

13 Appendix B – Dial-In Connectivity 13.1 Dial-In Server Configuration

Page 239

The next window appears:

Computer Management, Users

The new user has to be configured as a dial-in user. Select the user ‘altegr’. Do a right-mouse click and select ‘Properties’.

In the following window select the ‘Dial-in’ tab.

In the ‘Dial-in’ tab ensure that ‘Remote Access Permission (Dial-in or VPN)’ is set to ‘Allow access’.

Click ‘Apply’ and ‘OK’.

Computer Management, user properties, General (left) and Dial-in (right)

This finishes the dial-in user account configuration. Windows uses the following mechanism to find a dial-in user:

If the A.I.M.O.S machine is not part of a windows domain, it searches for a local user account.

If the A.I.M.O.S machine is part of a windows domain, windows uses the following mechanism to find the user:

If during the dial-in procedure, the dial-in user is given in the format <A.I.M.O.S server name>\<username>, windows searches for a local user account.

Page 240: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 240 M0125ANA.DOC

If during the dial-in procedure, the dial-in user is given in the format <domain name>\<username>, windows searches for a domain user account,

If during the dial-in procedure, the dial-in user is given in the format <username>, windows searches for a domain user account.

13.1.2.2 Adding a Domain Dial-in User

On the domain server the domain user configuration can be opened as follows: Right click on ‘My Programs->Administrative Tool->Active Directory Users and Computers’. The following window will appear:

Active Directory Users and Computers

Select ‘Users’ in the left part of the window, do a right-mouse click on the main window, and select ‘New -> User’. The following window appears: The default username/ password is ‘altegr/altegr’. Please ensure that all remote elements (ION/MMR, Node X, Britecell) are configured to use this login. In this configuration the user on the remote device can be set to either ‘altegr’ or ‘<domain name>\altegr’. Both options work. Press Next.

Active Directory Users and Computers, New User (1)

Page 241: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

13 Appendix B – Dial-In Connectivity 13.1 Dial-In Server Configuration

Page 241

Ensure ‘Password never expires’ is checked and press Next.

Press ‚Finish’.

Active Directory Users and Computers, New User (2) and New User (3)

Active Directory Users and Computers, Properties

Select the user you just added, do a right-mouse click on the main window and select ‘Properties’

Page 242: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 242 M0125ANA.DOC

Ensure that ‚password never expires’ is checked. Select the ‘Dial-in’ tab.

In the Dial-in tab, ensure that ‚Allow access’ is checked.

Active Directory Users and Computers, Account (left) and Dial-in (right)

This finishes the domain user configuration.

The RAS service shall be enabled via the Windows Routing and RAS service. ‘Incoming Connections’, which are configured via the ‘Settings->Network and Dialup Connections’, have to be removed before.

13.2 REMOTE ACCESS SERVER CONFIGURATION FOR WIN2003 SERVER – STANDARD EDITION

13.2.1 RRAS Server Configuration

The RRAS server configuration can be started via ‘Start Programs Administrative Tools Routing and remote access’.

The configuration consists of the following parts: RRAS server configuration wizard RRAS server configuration properties Configure RRAS policy

The configuration is not possible, if the windows firewall is running. It must be stopped and disabled during the configuration of the RRAS service. It can be started again afterwards.

It needs to be taken into account that the firewall must be configured to receive traps on UDP port that is configured in A.I.M.O.S. (default value = 162).

Page 243: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

13 Appendix B – Dial-In Connectivity 13.2 Remote Access Server Configuration For Win2003 S S

Page 243

Both Windows Firewall and the routing and RAS server use the same resources. So, before the RRAS can be started the firewall needs to be disabled. The routing and RAS service also provides a firewall service:

If a firewall is running proceed as follows: Select "Start - Control Panel - Windows Firewall" On the general Tab ensure that the firewall is switched off. Now stop and disable the Windows FW (windows firewall/internet connection service(ICS)) service via 'Start-Administrative Tools'.

Now configure the RRAS service: select “Start Administrative Tools Routing and Remote Access”.

In the left part of the window do a right-mouse click on <hostname>(local) and select ‘configure and enable Routing and Remote Access’.

RRAS (1) A new window pops up.

RRAS (2)

13.2.2 RRAS Server Configuration Wizard Select ’Remote access’ server and press Next.

RRAS, Routing and Remote Access Server Setup

Page 244: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 244 M0125ANA.DOC

Select ‘From a specified range of Select ‘Dial-up’ and press Next.

addresses’ and press Next.

RRAS, IP address assignment

RRAS, Remote Access

Press ’New’ in order to add a static pool of IP addresses.

RRAS, Address Range Assignment

Add an IP range according to your preferences. Ensure to reserve enough IP addresses (1 for the RAS server + 1 for each remote device that can be connected simultaneously the minimum number of IP addresses is the number of modems connected to the system increased by one).

RRAS, New Address Range

RRAS, Address Range Assignment

Page 245: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

13 Appendix B – Dial-In Connectivity 13.2 Remote Access Server Configuration For Win2003 S S

Page 245

Select ‘No, use Routing and Remote Access to authenticate connection reqests’ and press Next.

RRAS, Managing Multiple Remote Access Server

RRAS, Completing the Routing and Remote Access Server Setup Wizard

13.2.3 RRAS Server Properties

Open the RRAS server configuration via ‘Start Programs Administrative Tools Routing and remote access’.

In the left part of ‘Routing and RAS’ window, do a right-mouse click on <hostname>(local) and select ‘Properties’.

Page 246: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 246 M0125ANA.DOC

In the ’General’ tab select In the ’Security’ tab press the button ‘Remote access server’. ’Authentication Methods…’.

RRAS, Properties, General (left) and Security (right)

Only check ’Encrypted authentication (CHAP)’

RRAS, Authentication Methods

In the IP tab, ensure that ‘Allow IP-based remote access and demand-dial connections’ is set.

In the PPP tab, all flags shall be unchecked.

RRAS, IP RRAS, Properties, PPP

Page 247: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

13 Appendix B – Dial-In Connectivity 13.2 Remote Access Server Configuration For Win2003 S S

Page 247

RRAS, Ports

In the left window select ‘Ports’, do a right-mouse click, and select ‘Pproperties’.

Select the device to be used for RAS

and click on ‘Configure…’.

RRAS, Ports, Properties

Set the flag for ‘Remote access connections (inbound only)’.

Configure Device

Page 248: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 248 M0125ANA.DOC

13.2.4 RRAS Policy

A new policy needs to be created.

In the left part of the window select <hostname> (local) Remote Access Policy.

Do a right-mouse click in the main window and select the option to define a new policy.

RRAS, policy

The RRAS Policy Wizard starts: Press Next.

Select the option ‘Set up a custom policy’ and enter any policy name.

RRAS Policy Wizard: Policy Configuration Method

Page 249: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

13 Appendix B – Dial-In Connectivity 13.2 Remote Access Server Configuration For Win2003 S S

Page 249

Click on the ‘Add’ button to define the policy conditions.

Select ‘Day-And-Time-Restrictions’ and click on the ‘Add button’.

RRAS Policy Wizard: Policy Conditions (left) and Select Attribute (right) Ensure that the permission is granted at any time and click ‘OK’.

Confirm with Next.

RRAS Policy Wizard: Time of day constraints (left) and Policy Conditions (right) Ensure that ‘Grant remote access permission’ is selected.

Click on ‘Edit Profile’.

RRAS Policy Wizard: permissions (left) and Profile (right)

Page 250: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 250 M0125ANA.DOC

In all ‘Edit Dial-in Profile’ tabs illustrated in the following set the flags as illustrated:

RRAS Policy Wizard, Edit Dial-in Profile: Dial-in Constraints (left) and IP (right)

In the Authentication tab, ensure that ONLY ‘Encryption authentication (CHAP)’ is selected.

RRAS Policy Wizard, Edit Dial-in Profile: Multilink (left) and Authentication (right)

Page 251: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

13 Appendix B – Dial-In Connectivity 13.2 Remote Access Server Configuration For Win2003 S S

Page 251

RRAS, policy wizard, Edit Dial-in Profile, Encryption (left) and Advanced (right) Click ’Finish’ to complete the Policy Wizard.

RRAS, policy wizard

Ensure to restart the RRAS service: In the left part of ‘Routing and RAS’ window, do a right-mouse click on <hostname>(local) and select ‘All Tasks -> Restart’.

Page 252: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 252 M0125ANA.DOC

13.3 REMOTE ACCESS SERVER CONFIGURATION FOR WIN2008 The following chapters contain the descriptions for setting up a remote access server. The screenshots displayed may be slightly different depending on the operating system language settings and version of the operating system.

13.3.1 RRAS Server Configuration

To install the Routing and Remote Access proceed as follows: Install Windows Server 2008.

Click Start Administrative Tools Server Manager.

Under Roles Summary, click Add roles.

Click Next.

Select the ‘Network Policy and Access Services’ role

and click Next.

Page 253: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

13 Appendix B – Dial-In Connectivity 13.3 Remote Access Server Configuration for Win2008

Page 253

Select the ’Network Policy Server’ and the ‘Routing and Remote Access Services’.

and click Next.

Note: The check-marks for the subordinate ‘Remote Access Service’ and ‘Routing’ will be set automatically.

Click Install.

When the Installation Results dialog box appears, click Close.

Page 254: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 254 M0125ANA.DOC

13.3.2 RRAS Server Configuration Wizard Use the following steps to configure and enable the Routing and Remote Access service:

Click Start, Administrative Tools, Routing and Remote Access:

By default, the local computer is listed as a server. Right-click the server, and then select ‘Configure and Enable Routing and Remote Access’:

Page 255: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

13 Appendix B – Dial-In Connectivity 13.3 Remote Access Server Configuration for Win2008

Page 255

Click Next.

Click Custom configuration, and then click Next. Select all the services except NAT. Continue the Wizard as illustrated and click Next to get to the next screen.

Page 256: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 256 M0125ANA.DOC

Select ‘From a specified range of adresses’

Page 257: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

13 Appendix B – Dial-In Connectivity 13.3 Remote Access Server Configuration for Win2008

Page 257

Select ‘New’

Add IP address.

Select ‘Next’.

Make sure that enough IP addresses are available (one for the RAS server and one for each remote connection that shall be possible simultaneously). At least the amount of modems connected shall be reserved.

Page 258: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 258 M0125ANA.DOC

Select ‘No….’ and click ‘Next’.

Click Finish. Click OK, click Start service, and then click Finish.

Page 259: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

13 Appendix B – Dial-In Connectivity 13.3 Remote Access Server Configuration for Win2008

Page 259

13.3.3 RRAS Server Properties

Open the RRAS server configuration via ‘Start Programs Administrative Tools Routing and remote access’.

In the left part of ‘Routing and RAS’ window, do a right-mouse click on <hostname>(local) and select ‘Properties’.

In the ’General’ tab select In the ’Security’ tab press the button ‘IPv4 Remote access server’. ’Authentication Methods…’.

RRAS, Properties, General (left) and Security (right)

Page 260: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 260 M0125ANA.DOC

Only check ’Encrypted authentication (CHAP)’

RRAS, Authentication Methods

In the IPv4 tab, ensure that ‘Enable IPv4 Forwarding’ and ‘Static address pool’ are tagged. Choose ‘Allow RAS…’.

In the PPP tab, all flags shall be unchecked.

RRAS, IP RRAS, Properties, PPP

Page 261: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

13 Appendix B – Dial-In Connectivity 13.3 Remote Access Server Configuration for Win2008

Page 261

RRAS, Ports

In the left window select ‘Ports’, do a right-mouse click, and select ‘Properties’.

Select the device to be used for RAS

and click on ‘Configure…’.

RRAS, Ports, Properties

Set the flag for ‘Remote access connections (inbound only)’.

Configure Device

Page 262: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 262 M0125ANA.DOC

13.3.4 Network Policies

A new policy needs to be created.

In the left part of the window select Start Administrative Tools Network Policy Server Policies Network Policies.

Do a right-mouse click in the main window and select the option to define a new policy.

Enter a Policy name and select the Type of network access server. Continue with ‘Next’.

Click ‘Add…’ to specify the conditions.

Page 263: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

13 Appendix B – Dial-In Connectivity 13.3 Remote Access Server Configuration for Win2008

Page 263

Select the ‘Day and Time Restrictions’…

and click the ‘Add…’ button.

Ensure that permission is granted at any time and click ‘OK’.

Confirm with ‘Next’.

Page 264: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 264 M0125ANA.DOC

Select that Access is granted.

If required, click ‘Add…’ to add the EAP types shown in the following.

Make sure that ONLY ‘Encryption authentication (CHAP)’ is selected and continue with ‘Next’.

Page 265: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

13 Appendix B – Dial-In Connectivity 13.3 Remote Access Server Configuration for Win2008

Page 265

Continue with ‘Next’.

Click ‘Finish’ to complete the New Network Policy.

Page 266: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 266 M0125ANA.DOC

13.4 TESTING THE REMOTE ACCESS SERVER CONFIGURATION

The procedure described in this chapter is not a mandatory installation step, but allows verifying that the configuration of the RAS server was successful.

An extra modem is required to run this procedure. The extra modem is configured for a dial out connection and connects to the RAS server. The two involved modems can be installed on the same or on different computers.

13.4.1 Procedure for Win2003

For setting up the dial-out connection, open the Network connection window (Start->Settings->Network Connection). Start the ‘New Connection wizard’.

Network Connections

Click ’Next’ and make the settings as illustrated in the following:

Network Connection Wizard (1)

Network Connection Wizard (2)

Page 267: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

13 Appendix B – Dial-In Connectivity 13.4 Testing the Remote Access Server Configuration

Page 267

Network Connection Wizard (3) Select the modem that you want to use for the outgoing connection.

Network Connection Wizard (4) Select a name for this connection.

Network Connection Wizard (5)

Page 268: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 268 M0125ANA.DOC

Enter the phone number of the modem for the incoming connection.

Network Connection Wizard (6) Ensure that ’Anyone’s use’ is tagged.

Network Connection Wizard (7) Enter the user name password that you used for the RRAS server/incoming connection. The default is altegr/altegr.

Network Connection Wizard (8)

Page 269: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

13 Appendix B – Dial-In Connectivity 13.4 Testing the Remote Access Server Configuration

Page 269

Before completing the New Connection Wizard with ’Finish’ you can choose to ’Add a shortcut to this connection…’ by setting the according flag.

Network Connection Wizard (9) Press the ‘Dial’ button. After a while the system should indicate that the network connection was successfully setup.

Start dial out connection

Page 270: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 270 M0125ANA.DOC

13.4.2 Procedure for Win2008

First, a new dial-out connection has to be created. To do so, choose, Start Control Panel Network and Sharing Center Set up a new Connection or Network.

Choose ‘Set up a dial-up connection’ and click ’Next’.

Set Up a Connection or Network Select the modem to be used for the outgoing connection. (Depending on the system setup you may also need to click ‘Next’ to get to the next screen.)

Create a Dial-up Connection (1) Enter the phone number of the modem for the incoming connection, as well as the user name and password that you used for the RRAS server/incoming connection. The default is altegr/altegr.

Type in a connection name.

Ensure that ‘Allow other people…’ is tagged.

Click ‘Connect’.

Create a Dial-up Connection (2)

Page 271: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

13 Appendix B – Dial-In Connectivity 13.4 Testing the Remote Access Server Configuration

Page 271

In case the following error message appears (e. g. if the modem is not on or at the first setup) select to ‘Set up the connection anyway’.

Create a Dial-up Connection (3) The connection setup is now finished.

Create a Dial-up Connection (4) To configure the new dial-out connection, proceed as explained in the following. Choose Start Control Panel Network and Sharing Center Change Adapter Settings:

Select the newly created dial-out connection by a right-mouse click and choose Properties.

Page 272: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 272 M0125ANA.DOC

In the Networking tab select the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and choose Properties:

In the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties set the tags as shown below and click Advanced:

In the Advanced TCP/IP Settings set the tags as shown and set the Interface Metric to ‚1’:

Confirm with OK.

Page 273: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

14 Appendix C – HTTPS Certificate Handling 14.1 Certificate Selection

Page 273

14 APPENDIX C – HTTPS CERTIFICATE HANDLING In order to cause A.I.M.O.S. to use HTTPS not only within the WEB tab card (integrated WEB browser) but also during a file upload / SW update, it is necessary to install the certificate at the A.I.M.O.S. server into the 'Local Computer' certificate store. To do so, proceed as follows

14.1 CERTIFICATE SELECTION The recommended way to select the certificate is to use the Security Alert of the Web tab card as explained on the next page. It is, however, also possible to select the certificate via the Internet Explorer. To do so, choose ‘Continue to this website (not recommended)’ when the first-time connection to the NE is not successful.

Click Certificate Error to continue.

To select the certificate choose View certificates

Then, continue with the installation (see 14.2).

Page 274: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 274 M0125ANA.DOC

The more direct way to select the certificate is using the Security Alert of the Web tab card. This alert will be opened when the Web tab card for an NE is opened for the first time if the NE supports HTTPS and HTTPS is selected as encryption type in the WEB Server Configuration (see chapter 6.9.5.5):

Click View Certificate to continue. Then, proceed with the installation as follows:

14.2 CERTIFICATE INSTALLATION

Note: For remote A.I.M.O.S. clients it is necessary to import the certificate at each client machine (per Windows user: standard import; or for all users: import to 'Local Computer' store).

Click Install Certificate… .

Page 275: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

14 Appendix C – HTTPS Certificate Handling 14.2 Certificate Installation

Page 275

Browse … … to the Trusted Root Certification Authorities and tag Show physical stores to display the Local Computer directory to install the certificate there. Otherwise the certificate will be installed to the default Registry directory and will only be available for the current user:

Choose the Local Computer directory to make certificate available for all Windows user accounts of the machine including the 'Local System account' which is the logon account used by the A.I.M.O.S. Connector service (that actually performs the HTTP upload requests during the corresponding schedules).

Click OK to continue.

Click ‘Yes’ if presented with the following warning.

The successful certificate import will be confirmed as follows:

Click OK to end the procedure.

Page 276: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 276 M0125ANA.DOC

For your notes:

Page 277: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

15 Index

Page 277

15 INDEX ? Menu ................................................................. 99 A.I.M.O.S.

Backup/Restore Database..................... 205, 206 Components .................................................... 19 Main Program .................................................. 91 Rights .............................................................. 72 Validate.......................................................... 208 Visu Version Info.............................................. 99

Account Management........................................... 70 Account Manager ................................................. 67

NE Owner ........................................................ 79 Organizations................................................... 69 Roles ......................................................... 70, 76 Users ............................................................... 77

Accounts, Enable............................................ 45, 78 ACK Capability ..................................................... 84 Actions, Scheduler.............................................. 158 Adapter, OMC 3.54......................................... 72, 88 Add

Folder ............................................................ 123 License ............................................................ 40 New Network Element ...........Look Up New NE

Administrator Role .......................................... 72, 76 AgentSim............................................................ 213 Alarm

Forwarding....................................................... 70 Help ............................................................... 127 History ........................................................... 127 Latency .......................................................... 133 Limiter .............................................................. 42 List ................................................................. 126 Polling.............................................................. 87 Polling, Settings ............................................... 59 Profiles................................................... 196, 199 Representation ................................................ 59 Settings............................................................ 57 Severities ....................................................... 133 Thresholds ..................................................... 134 Type................................................................. 57

Alarms Alarming Enabled ............................................ 96 Export ...................................................... 93, 126 External.......................................... 121, 122, 132 Flash.............................................................. 186 Import .............................................................. 94 Message ........................................ 112, 116, 120 Port Assignment ............................................ 120 Query..................................................... 123, 161 Recognize, Select All ....................................... 98 Text in Extra Line............................................. 97

Alternate SNMP Agent, IP Address / Port ............ 49 Andrew OMC 3.54 ................................................ 88 Any New Network Element ................................. 108 Assigned Folder, Role .......................................... 78 Auditory Alarm Notifications ................................. 89 Automatic Backup................................................. 89 Backup/Restore

Database ......................................... 89, 205, 206 NE Configuration ........................... 125, 136, 159 Server Configuration Tool Settings .......... 39, 207

CC Concatenator.................................................. 70 ComasTest ......................................................... 215 CommScope........................................................... 9

Configuration A.I.M.O.S. .................................................39, 205 Alarm System ................................................ 160 Connectivity ................................................... 138 Data ............................................................... 125 Dial-In ............................................................ 139 Dial-In Server................................................. 235 Email Forwarding............................................. 51 File, Send ...................................................... 161 File, Upload ................................................... 162 Function......................................................... 128 GPS-Based.................................................... 132 Group Profile, Select...................................... 107 Group Profile, Set .......................................... 198 LDAP ............................................................... 46 Modem......................................................24, 231 Port ................................................................ 120 Remote Access / RRAS Server Win2003 ...... 242 Remote Access / RRAS Server Win2008 ...... 252 Server .........................................................23, 39 WEB Server................................................... 146

Configuration Tool .. Look Up Server Configuration Connectivity........................................................ 128 Connectivity Management .................................... 70 Connectivity Manager........................................... 61

Modem Management....................................... 61 Modem Properties, Settings ............................ 62 Modems (Discover, Groups)............................ 63 Profiles............................................................. 64 Wireless Status................................................ 62

Connector Logs .................................................... 98 Contact Addresses ....................................10, 11, 12 Coordinated Universal Time ................................. 70 Create Export ..................................................... 175 Create Performance Data Chart......................... 172 Database Administration Tool ............................ 205 Database Version Info .......................................... 99 Declaration of Conformity ....................................... 9 Default Port, Outgoing SNMP Traps .................... 49 Email .................................................................... 52 Enable, Accounts ............................................45, 78 Event Triggered Actions ..................................... 159 Excel Export ......................................................... 93

Alarm Data..................................................... 188 Alarm List....................................................... 126 Alarm Profile Settings .................................... 200 Backup List, HID............................................ 136 Job List .......................................................... 180 Logs (Visu Logs).....................................138, 182 NE List ........................................................... 179 Notes ............................................................. 138 User Data ........................................................ 80

Export Create............................................................ 175 NE Backup to File ............................................ 94 Profiles........................................................... 201 Users ............................................................... 80 via ODBC......................................................... 88 XML File .......................................................... 93

External I/Os....................................................... 132 External Tools

Profiles........................................................... 202 Extras Menu ......................................................... 98

Page 278: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

User’s Manual for A.I.M.O.S. V2.13

Page 278 M0125ANA.DOC

Fade Out ............................................................ 180 Field Chooser ............................................. 104, 111 File Menu.............................................................. 92 File Upload ......................................................... 162 Filters

Conversion of Filter Type............................... 108 Custom Filter ................................................. 105 Customize in Scheduler ................................. 151 Filter Builder................................................... 105 Filter Settings................................................. 107 Import from Scheduler ................................... 107 NE Filter (Builder) .................................. 105, 106 NE List ........................................................... 179 Static/Dynamic............................................... 107 Table Filters ................................................... 103

Folder Add ................................................................ 123 Assigned.......................................................... 78

Footer ................................................................. 104 Functions (Bar) ............................................. 91, 125 Generated Community Names ............................. 49 GPS Position ...................................................... 128

Alarms ........................................................... 126 Get......................................................... 124, 128 Show Columns............................................... 103 Trap Format ..................................................... 82 Visualization..................................................... 60

GPS-Based Configuration .................................. 132 Grid Layouts ....................................................... 104 Group Profile, Select .......................................... 107 Group Profile, Set ............................................... 198 Hardware Inventory Data.................................... 136 Heartbeat............................................................ 128 HELO Name ......................................................... 52 Housekeeping....................................................... 55 HW/RF................................................................ 132 IE Settings ............................................................ 17 Import

Alarms, Organizations ..................................... 94 Users ............................................................... 80 XML File................................................... 92, 153

Including NEs to the Map ................................... 184 Inventory Data .................................................... 136 IP Address / Port, Alternate SNMP Agent ............ 49 Job Monitor......................................................... 180 LDAP .................................................................... 46 Legacy Taskbar .................................................... 60 Licenses ......................................................... 33, 40 List of Backups ................................................... 207 Local Time............................................................ 70 Lockout Settings ................................................... 45 Log Feature .................................................. 60, 138 Login............................................................... 35, 48

Change ............................................................ 94 Configuration, WEB ....................................... 145 Loggings ........................................................ 181 SASL ............................................................... 53 SNMP .............................................................. 49 WEB Profiles............................................ 66, 135

Maintenance, Function ....................................... 136 Maintenance, Tool .............................................. 205 Management Interface.......................................... 91 Map .................................................................... 182

Buttons, Check Boxes ................................... 182 Include Subunits ............................................ 186 Including NEs................................................. 184 View............................................................... 186

MapPoint 2006, 2009 ......................................... 182 MCC, MCNC .................................................69, 229 Menu Bar.............................................................. 91 Menus................................................................... 92

? Menu............................................................. 99 Extras .............................................................. 98 File................................................................... 92 Tools................................................................ 95 Tree ................................................................. 95 View................................................................. 97 Windows .......................................................... 99

MIB................................................................50, 229 MIB, Test Program ............................................. 216 Minimum Password Length .................................. 44 MMR................................................................... 229 MNC ..............................................................69, 229 Modem (Groups, Usage) ...................................... 63 MU OTRx ........................................................... 229 NE ...................................................................... 230

Filter (Builder) .........................................105, 106 List ................................................................. 179 New ............................................................... 108 Number.......................................................... 181 Operations ..................................................... 123 Owner, Account Manager ................................ 79 Owner, Northbound Manager .......................... 85 Tree ..........................................91, 100, 108, 125 Vector Map .................................................... 182

NE3S.......................................................50, 84, 230 Network Element ................................ Look Up NE Network Policies Win2008.................................. 262 New NE .............................................................. 108

AMR............................................................... 113 DICE.............................................................. 120 Generic, 1, 2 ...........................................121, 122 ION-B............................................................. 115 ION-E System................................................ 117 ION-M............................................................ 118 ION-M miniMaster.......................................... 121 ION-U System ............................................... 117 MCPA ............................................................ 114 MIR-T............................................................. 121 MR2003P, MR2133 ....................................... 122 MRx18 ........................................................... 120 Node X........................................................... 109 SMS-Connected NE ...................................... 119

NMS ................................................................... 230 Node X ................................................................. 15 Nokia Enhanced SNMP Solution Suite............... 230 Northbound Interface............................................ 49 Northbound Manager............................................ 81

NE Owner ........................................................ 85 Notes .................................................................. 138 ODBC................................................................... 88 Off Duty, System .........................................130, 161 OMC Version Info................................................. 99 OMC3................................................................... 51

Adapter .....................................................88, 203 Backup/Restore Database..............205, 206, 207 Rights .............................................................. 72 Validate Database ......................................... 208

Online Help........................................................... 15 Organization Code ............................................... 40 Organizations, Account Manager ......................... 69 Outgoing SNMP Traps, Default Port .................... 49 Parent Map......................................................... 182

Page 279: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13

15 Index

Page 279

Password Lockout Settings .............................................. 45 Node A(M) ..................................................... 172 Settings...................................................... 44, 45

Performance Data Chart, Create ........................ 172 Performance Data, Read.................................... 171 Performance Manager........................................ 186 Preferences Editor................................................ 57

Alarm Polling, Settings..................................... 59 Connectivity Pages .......................................... 58 Scheduler Settings........................................... 58 Severity Icons .................................................. 59

Private SNMP Community Name ......................... 49 Profiles ............................................................... 196 Query Alarms.............................................. 123, 161 Query All............................................................. 124 RDN.................................................................... 230

Concatenator, Separator, Translation.............. 70 Read Only User Role............................................ 76 Read Performance Data..................................... 171 Recognize Trap .................................................... 84 Removing NEs from the Map.............................. 185 Replace, System ................................................ 161 Restore...........................Look Up Backup/Restore Revision Info....................................................... 136 Rights, Account Manager ..................................... 70 Roles .................................................................... 76

Account Manager............................................. 70 Administrator.................................................... 76 Standard User.................................................. 76

RRAS Policy Win2003........................................ 248 RRAS Server Properties Win2003...................... 245 RRAS Server Properties Win2008...................... 259 SASL .................................................................. 230

Login................................................................ 53 Scheduler ........................................................... 148

Actions........................................................... 157 Connectivity Settings ..................................... 150 Create Performance Data Chart .................... 172 Customize Actions ......................................... 152 Customize Network Elements........................ 151 Customize Schedule...................................... 149 File Upload..................................................... 162 Read Performance Data ................................ 171 Software Update ............................................ 166 XML Import .................................................... 153

SDN.................................................................... 230 Select New NE ...........................Look Up New NE Server Configuration............................... 23, 39, 207 Severity Colors ..................................................... 57 Severity Icons ....................................................... 59 Show Alarm Help.......................................... 99, 126 SMPP ........................................................... 53, 230 SMPP-Gateway .................................................... 53 SMSC ........................................................... 53, 230 SMS-Connected NE, Add................................... 119 SMTP ................................................................... 51

SNMP Agent ..................................................48, 81, 203 Agent Shutdown Delay .................................... 49 Alarm Forwarding .......................................70, 81 Alarm Traps ..................................................... 81 Alternate Agent IP Address, Port ..................... 50 GUI ................................................................ 203 Manager Settings............................................. 81 MIB Version Info .............................................. 99 Northbound...................................................... 48 Outgoing Traps................................................ 48 Private Community Name................................ 49 Traps ............................................................... 70 UDP................................................................. 48 V2C.................................................................. 70

Software Update................................................. 166 Sort Options ....................................................... 104 SRMU..........................................................229, 230 Standard User Role.............................................. 76 Status Bar........................................................91, 92 Supervision Tab ................................................. 126 System Off Duty, Clear....................................... 161 System Replaced ............................................... 161 Table Filters........................................................ 103 Technical Support .............................................. 224 Test Tools........................................................... 213 Test-Trap.............................................................. 81 Time Format ......................................................... 70 Time Schedule Option ........................................ 148 Tools Menu........................................................... 95 Trap

Forwarding....................................................... 81 Info, Legacy Trap Info...................................... 70 Recognize........................................................ 84 SNMP .............................................................. 70

TrapMonitor ........................................................ 216 Traps/Notifications................................................ 81 Tree View ...................................Look Up NE Tree Update A.I.M.O.S. / From File .....................209, 210 Uplink Connection Parameter............................. 110 User Data, Export ................................................. 80 User Name ......................................................77, 92 Users Import/Export.............................................. 80 UTC...............................................................70, 230 Validate, Database ............................................. 208 Vector Map ......................................................... 182 Version Info .......................................................... 99 View.................................................................... 186

Menu................................................................ 97 Runs .............................................................. 149

Visu Logs...............................................60, 138, 225 Visu Version Info .................................................. 99 WatchDog

Client Window.................................................. 35 Tool................................................................ 186

WEB Server Configuration ................................. 146 Windows Menu..................................................... 99 Workshift Assignment........................................... 85 Workshift Settings ................................................ 81 XML Import, Export .......................................93, 153 Zoom In, Out ...................................................... 182

Page 280: M0125ANA_AIMOS_V2_13